JP2006280671A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance the attractiveness of games by making the display aspect during the variable display of the identifying information harder to previously recognize by accomplishing a highly diversified display. <P>SOLUTION: The conditions for starting a special pattern game are established on the first special pattern display device and when the reservation memory counts exceed a prescribed value with the first jackpot flag on, a variation pattern D (jackpot) with the variation time larger than others is selectively decided. Thereafter, when the conditions for starting another special pattern game are established on the second special pattern display device, a variation pattern is decided from the value of a frequency of performance counter, the value of a performance mode flag, the value of a performance pattern flag and the like. As a result, the first performance is executed to display the informative information 60a-60c by characters and also the second performance, to display images different from the characters. From the array information of the decoration symbols and the index number in the animation variation, the decoration symbols to be displayed are switched to be specified while the images with varied display aspects are specified for the respective symbols. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2007,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, a first image that displays a variation display image of a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the first variation start condition being satisfied. A display means, and a second image display means for displaying a variable display image of a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified based on the establishment of the second fluctuation start condition, and the identification by the first image display means It is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of information becomes a predetermined specific display result or when the display result of the variable display of identification information by the second image display means becomes the specific display result. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, display can be made variable by displaying predetermined identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as “LCD”). There are a number of games that are enhanced by a so-called variable display game that determines whether or not to give a predetermined game value based on the display result.

  Some variable display games are played by using the above display device as an image display device. In such a variable display game, when the game ball passing through the start winning opening is detected (variation execution condition is established), the display symbol variation display is started, and when the display symbol variation display is completely stopped ( In this game, the case where the (determined symbol) mode is the specific display mode is “big hit”. When a “big hit” is made in a special game, a special electric combination called a big prize opening or an attacker is opened, and a state in which a game ball can be won extremely easily is provided to a player for a certain period of time. This state is referred to as a “specific game state”.

The player plays a game with the goal of obtaining this specific gaming state. Therefore, the player's attention will be concentrated on the display of the variation of the identification information and the display of the variation result. Various proposals have been made in order to enhance the interest and make the display process more efficient by making the display of the variation of the identification information and the display of the variation result rich. For example, there has been proposed one that displays a symbol by designating the type, size, position, and orientation of the symbol to be displayed in the symbol variation area and displaying the symbol in a variable manner (for example, Patent Document 1).
JP 2003-216963 A

In addition, as a gaming machine capable of executing the same game as the above variable display game, a plurality of symbol display devices are provided in the same game area so that each symbol having the same role as the display symbol can be variably displayed. In the gaming machines each having a special winning opening corresponding to each of the symbol display devices, there have been proposed ones that prevent multiple hits from occurring simultaneously (for example, Patent Document 2 and Patent Document 3).
JP 2001-62080 A JP 2001-62081 A

  In the technique described in Patent Document 1, in order to control the variation of the symbol by designating the type and size of the symbol array, only a change in display is given to the extent that the size and orientation of the symbol changes. It was not interesting. Here, it is conceivable to store image data for each symbol arrangement and variation pattern in order to increase the change of the display symbol or to make the display symbol high-definition. When display image data) is stored for each symbol array and variation pattern, the amount of data increases and the control becomes complicated.

  Further, in the techniques disclosed in Patent Literature 2 and Patent Literature 3, the effect in one symbol display device is determined independently of the effect in other symbol display devices. For this reason, when a specific effect is performed on any of the symbol display devices, there is a problem that the player's interest in the effect on the other symbol display devices is reduced.

  In addition, when determining the variable display mode in one of the plurality of symbol display devices, the variable display mode in another symbol display device could not be determined or changed. It was not possible to sufficiently enhance the gaming interest by performing variable display.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and enables a variety of variable display, and enhances the interest of the game by appropriately determining the variable display mode in a plurality of symbol display devices. An object is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

  In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present application has a first variation start condition (for example, that a game ball has won the normal variable winning ball device 6A or a game to the normal variable winning ball device 6A). A plurality of types of identification information (for example, a special symbol or the like) that can be identified based on the fact that the previous special symbol game or the big hit gaming state by the first special symbol display device 4A is established after the ball has won. The first image display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first image display device 5A, etc.) for displaying the variation display image of the decorative symbol) and the second variation start condition (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 6B) That the ball has won, or that the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state by the second special symbol display device 4B is completed after the game ball has won the normal variable winning ball device 6B). And second image display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 4B, the second image display device 5B, etc.) for displaying a variable display image of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and decorative symbols) that can each be identified. And when the display result of the variation display of the identification information by the first image display means becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big-decision symbol or a big-decision combination decorative symbol), or the second When the display result of the variation display of the identification information by the image display means becomes the specific display result, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player Whether the display result of the variation display of the identification information by the first image display means is the specific display result, and the table of the variation display of the identification information by the second image display means Prior determination means for determining whether or not the result is the specific display result before the display result of the variation display of the identification information is derived and displayed (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the big hit / probability change determination process in step S229) Or in the second special symbol process executed in step S17, the portion corresponding to the big hit / probability change determination process in step S229) and the determination result of the prior determination means, Stop identification information determination means for determining final stop identification information that is a display result of the variable display of identification information by each of the first and second image display means (for example, the production control CPU 130 performs steps S568, S571-S573, S575, S577, S579). In the part that executes this process and in the second display control process, the corresponding process is executed. And the variable display from the start of the variable display of the identification information by each of the first and second image display means until the display result is derived and displayed according to the determination result of the prior determination means Fluctuation display time setting means for setting the time to any one of a plurality of predetermined variation display times (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation start time processing in step S111, or in step S17) In the second special symbol process executed in step S111), the variable display by the first image display means is started, and then the first image display means When the variable display time set by the variable display time setting means has elapsed since the start of variable display, the stop identification information determination unit The final stop identification information determined by the above-mentioned is derived and displayed on the first image display means to stop the fluctuation, start the fluctuation display by the second image display means, and then start the fluctuation display by the second image display means Then, when the variable display time set by the variable display time setting means has elapsed, the final stop identification information determined by the stop identification information determining means is derived and displayed on the second image display means. Corresponding to steps S112 and S113 in the variable display control means to be stopped (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display control process in step S112 and the variable stop process in step S113, or the second special symbol process executed in step S17) The part for executing the processing to be performed, the effect control CPU 130 performs the decorative symbol variable display processing in S152 and A part for executing the decorative symbol stop waiting process in step S153, a part for executing the process corresponding to steps S152 and S153 in the second display control process, a part for executing the display image generation process by the VDP 133, and the like When the determination means determines that the display result of the variation display of the identification information by the first image display means is the specific display result, the variation of the identification information by the first image display means is performed by the variation display control means. A specific effect determining means (for example, CPU 103) for determining whether or not to execute the specific effect in the variable display of the identification information by the second image display means before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the display is started. Is the part that executes the processes of steps S241, S245, and S250 to S253, the second special symbol process In step S241, S245, S250 to S253, etc.) and the specific effect determining means determines that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, FIG. (A) to (G) for specific effect execution means (for example, steps S404, S407, S409, S415, S418, S423, S427, S428, S445, S449, S502 to S507). In accordance with the above process, in step S594, the display control CPU 130 causes the second image display device 5B to perform the effect display based on the notification information 60a to 60d as shown in FIGS. , S419, S424, S429, S447, S450, In accordance with the processing of 508 to S513, in step S594, the display control CPU 130 causes the second image display device 5B to display the effect as shown in FIGS. 21E to 21G, a second special symbol process. In the processing, the CPU 103 for display control corresponds to the processing corresponding to steps S404, S407, S409, S415, S418, S423, S427, S428, S445, S449, S502 to S507 by the CPU 103 in FIGS. The part that causes the first image display device 5A to perform the effect display by the notification information 60a to 60d as shown, corresponds to steps S416, S419, S424, S429, S447, S450, and S508 to S513 by the CPU 103 in the second special symbol process. CPU 1 for display control according to the processing to be performed In order to display each of the plurality of types of identification information in a plurality of display modes, such as a portion where 0 is an effect display by an image as shown in FIGS. 21 (E) to 21 (F). Identification information image data storage means for storing the image data (for example, an area of addresses 00000H to 549FFH in the CGROM 134), and the type and arrangement of the identification information stored in the identification information image data storage means Identification information array specifying information (for example, decorative pattern numbers “0” to “9”) and identification information image change specifying information (for example, animation variation index) for specifying the image change and change order of each identification information Numbers “1” to “5” or “1” to “10” and the like are stored in association with identification information specific information storage means (for example, ROM 131). In which the index data tables T11 and T12 are stored, the “ring”, “character # 2” and “character # 3” data stored in the index data tables T13 and T14, etc.) and the identification information Speed change direction specifying means (for example, the display control CPU 130 refers to the change speed / direction tables T31, T32, T331 to T333, T341 to T343). Display area specifying means (for example, the display control CPU 130 refers to the index data table T11 or the like or the display area size data table T20). And the variable speed direction designation means Sequence information specifying means (for example, for display control) for specifying the sequence information of the identification information to be changed and displayed based on the information indicating the fluctuation speed and direction specified in the above and the identification information sequence specifying information. CPU 130 executes steps S603, S612, S622, and S632), the sequence information specified by the sequence information specifying unit, and the identification information image change specification stored in the identification information specific information storage unit Change image data specifying means for specifying image data of identification information to be changed based on the information (for example, a portion where the display control CPU 130 executes the process of step S606), and the variable display The control means is configured to extract the image data specified by the change image data specifying means from the identification information image data storage means. The change image display control means (for example, the display control CPU 130 in step S607) changes the image of the identification information by repeating the process of displaying the read and read image data in the display area specified by the display area specifying means. For example, a portion in which the VDP 133 executes the processes of steps S651 to S653).

  In the gaming machine according to claim 2, the changing image data specifying means (for example, display control) for specifying the image data of the identification information to be changed and displayed based on the arrangement information specified by the arrangement information specifying means. CPU 130 for executing the processing of step S616, etc., and the fluctuation display control means reads the image data specified by the changing image data specifying means from the identification information image data storage means and reads the read image. By repeating the process of displaying the data in the display area specified by the display area specifying means, the changing image display control means (for example, the display control CPU 130 displays the image in step S594) without changing the identification information image. Display control processing is executed, and fluctuation speed / direction data tables T32, T331 to T333 When reading the data of the "no animation" from T341～T343, including partial etc.) VDP133 is executing the processing in step S651～S653.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 3, first variation direction designation data designating a first variation direction predetermined as a variation direction of the identification information designated by the variation speed direction designation means, and the first variation Based on the second variation direction designation data for designating the second variation direction that is the return direction of the direction and the second variation direction designation data, the return position when the identification information varies in the second variation direction is identified. Control data storage means (for example, the return shown in FIG. 17 in the ROM 131 in FIG. 17) stores return position data specified for each time and stop position data specifying the final stop position of the final stop identification information determined by the stop identification information determination means. For example, an area for storing data of “change direction” in the position data and change speed / direction data table T32). Based on the first change direction designation data stored in the control data storage means, change display is performed in the first change direction (for example, the display control CPU 130 executes image display control processing in step S594, and changes the change speed). When the “change direction” read from the direction data table T32 is “1 symbol (↓)” and “no animation” data is read from the change speed / direction data table T32, the VDP 133 performs steps S651 to S653. After the variable display is performed by the varying image display control unit, the variation display control unit is stored in the control data storage unit when stopping the variation of the identification information. The variation display in the second variation direction is performed based on the second variation direction designating data and the return position data corresponding to the identification information to be stopped. Subsequently to the stop, the return display control means at the time of stop (for example, display control) that performs the change display in the first change direction based on the first change direction designation data and the stop position data stored in the control data storage means. CPU 130 executes the image display control process in step S594, reads the data “with animation” from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T32, and sets the return amount, fluctuation speed / fluctuation direction set in steps S582 and S583. When the processing of steps S611 to S617 is executed based on the above, the VDP 133 executes the processing of steps S651 to S653, so that, for example, images in XX1 to XX9, YY1 to YY9 are displayed in the first and second image display devices 5A, 5B) and the like.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 4, effect image data storage means (for example, addresses 60000H to 604FFH in CGROM 134) that stores image data for displaying an effect image used for a predetermined effect display in a plurality of display modes. 30D) and the effect image change specifying information for specifying the image change and change order of the effect image stored in the effect image data storage means. Effect image specifying information storage means (for example, a portion for storing data of “ring effect # 1” to “ring effect # 5” stored in the index data table T13 in the ROM 131) and the effect image specifying The image change and change order of the effect image specified by the effect image change specifying information stored in the information storage means Accordingly, effect image data specifying means for specifying the image data of the effect image to be combined with the image data of the identification information specified by either the changing image data specifying means or the changing image data specifying means (for example, changing speed / A portion that executes the process of step S628 when the display control CPU 130 determines Yes in step S627 by reading the data of “image C” or “image D” from the direction data tables T331 to T333. And the change display control means reads out the image data specified by either the change image data specifying means or the changing image data specifying means from the identification information image data storage means, and The effect image data is the image data specified by the image data specifying means. Composite display control means (for example, variable speed / direction) that changes the image of the identification information by repeating the process of reading out from the memory means and combining the read image data and displaying it in the display area specified by the display area specifying means When the data of “image C” or “image D” is read from the data tables T331 to T333, the display control CPU 130 executes the process of step S629, and the VDP 133 executes the processes of steps S651 to S655 accordingly. By doing so, for example, the images on the “middle” variable display unit DC shown in FIGS. 18C to 19G, 19C to 19G, and FIGS. The second image display device 5A, 5B, etc.), and identification information following the variable display by the variable image display control means The change image display control means performs change display for changing the display mode of the identification information whose change has been stopped based on the image data specified by the change image data specifying means (for example, change). When the “animation present” data is read from the speed / direction data tables T331 and T332, the display control CPU 130 executes the process of step S629, and the VDP 133 executes the processes of steps S651 to S653 accordingly. 18 (C) to (I), FIGS. 19 (C) to (I) and FIGS. 20 (C) to (I), for example, the images on the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR. For example, a portion of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B to be displayed), and the composite display control means is configured such that the variable information display mode of the identification information is the display. When reach is a variable display mode in which the identification information that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the specific display result at a stage where the result has not yet been derived and displayed (for example, FIGS. 18C to 18G) ) And FIGS. 19C to 19G and the reach as shown in FIGS. 20D to 20G), the combined image data is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 5, the effect images of a plurality of display modes used for a predetermined effect display are combined with an image for displaying each of the plurality of types of identification information in a single display mode. Image data (for example, “with design animation”) and image data in which the effect image is combined with an image for displaying each of the plurality of types of identification information in a plurality of display modes (for example, “with design animation”) And the effect change image data storage means (for example, an area for storing the image data shown in FIGS. 85A and 85B at addresses 60000H to 749FFH in the CGROM 134) and the effect change image. Production variation image arrangement specifying information for specifying the type and arrangement of images stored in the data storage means, image changes, Production variation specific information storage means for storing production variation image change identification information for specifying the order of conversion (for example, “no design animation”, “design animation exists” data stored in the index data table T14 in the ROM 131) Etc.), information indicating the fluctuation speed and fluctuation direction designated by the fluctuation speed direction designating means, and the effect fluctuation image arrangement specifying information, and synthesized as a change display target The display control CPU 130 performs the process of step S632 when the data of the “image E” or “image F” is read out from the variation information arrangement information specifying means for specifying the image arrangement information (for example, the fluctuation speed / direction table T343). A portion to be executed, etc.), arrangement information specified by the arrangement information specifying means at the time of effect change, and the effect change Based on the production variation image change identification information stored in the identification information storage unit, production variation image data identification unit (for example, from the variation speed / direction table T343) that identifies the synthesized image data to be changed and displayed. The display control CPU 130 executes the process of step S636 when the data of “image E” or “image F” is read out), and the variable display control means specifies the effect variable image data. By repeating the process of reading the synthesized image data specified by the means from the effect variation image data storage means and displaying the read image data in the display area specified by the display area specifying means, the image of the identification information Effect change display control means (for example, from the change speed / direction table T343, "image E" or When the data of “image F” is read, the CPU 130 for display control executes the process of step S637, and the VDP 133 executes the processes of steps S651 to S653 in response to this, for example, FIG. To (G), FIGS. 19 (C) to (G) and FIGS. 20 (D) to (G), the images in the “middle” variable display unit DC are displayed on either of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. The change image display control means is specified by the change image data specifying means after the change of the identification information is stopped following the change display by the changing image display control means. Based on the image data, a change display is performed to change the display mode of the identification information whose change has been stopped (for example, “with animation” from the change speed / direction data tables T341 and T342). When the data is read, the display control CPU 130 executes the process of step S637, and the VDP 133 executes the processes of steps S651 to S653 in response to this, for example, FIG. 18 (C) to (I), FIG. 19 (C) to (I) and FIGS. 20 (C) to (I) show images on the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR in either of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. The display variation display control means is such that the variation display mode of the identification information is the stage where the display result is not yet derived and displayed and the identification information already derived and displayed is the specific display. At the time of reach which is a variable display mode satisfying the resulting condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 18 (C) to (G), FIGS. 19 (C) to (G) and FIGS. 20 (D) to (G). When you reach a reach A, displays the composite image data.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 6, size designation means for designating the size of the identification information (for example, the display control CPU 130 refers to the display area size data table T20 in the processing of steps S604, S613, S623, and S633). The variable display control means changes the size of the image data read from the identification information image data storage means based on the size designated by the size designation means. The process of displaying the image on the display area specified by the display area specifying means is repeated (for example, the display control CPU 130 executes the processes of steps S607, S617, S629, and S637, and the VDP 133 responds accordingly to step S653. The part that performs the process).

  The present invention has the following effects.

According to the configuration of the first aspect, a plurality of image data having different display modes is prepared for each identification information, and the identification information is switched and specified by the change image data specifying means. Images with different display modes are specified. Accordingly, an arbitrarily changing display such as an animation can be performed while performing a variable display, and an image rich in performance can be displayed.
In addition, after the variation display of the identification information by the first image display means based on the establishment of the first variation start condition is started, the specific effect is executed in the variation display of the identification information by the second image display means, The specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variation display of the identification information by the first image display means.
Thereby, the specific gaming state based on the display of the variation result of the identification information on the first image display means and the specific gaming state based on the display of the variation result of the identification information on the second image display means are prevented from occurring simultaneously. Can do.
Furthermore, when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variation display of the identification information by the first image display means, the specific effect is executed in the variation display of the identification information by the second image display means. In addition, it is possible to give interest to both the first and second image display means, and to enhance the interest of the game.
In addition, since the variation display of the identification information by the second image display means can be started even when the variation display of the identification information by the first image display means is executed, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased. .

  In the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the changing display of the identification information is performed by switching and specifying the image data of the identification information to be displayed by the changing image data specifying means. As a result, a variable display without animation is possible, and a variety of variations of identification information can be displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 3, when stopping the fluctuation of the identification information, it once returns in the return direction with respect to the predetermined fluctuation direction so far, and then moves in the predetermined fluctuation direction. It is possible to display an impression that the identification information is bouncing. Moreover, since the return amount is set according to the identification information, for example, when the identification information accompanies the character, the return amount can be set according to the characteristics of each character such as the standard weight of the character. The real-world features can be reflected in the display.

In the gaming machine according to claim 4, the image data of the identification information specified by either the changing image data specifying means or the changing image data specifying means and the effect image data specifying means are specified based on the image change and the changing order. The composite display control means repeats the process of combining and displaying the image data of the effect image with the changed display mode.
Thereby, it is possible to display a variable display image rich in change.

In the gaming machine according to claim 5, the arrangement information specifying unit at the time of effect change specifies the arrangement information of the synthesized image to be displayed based on the change speed and direction and the image arrangement, and the effect change image The data specifying means is a composition to be displayed in the display area of the size specified by the display area specifying means based on the arrangement information specified by the arrangement information specifying means at the time of effect change and the effect change image change specifying information. Identified image data. Then, the effect change display control means repeats the process of reading out and displaying the image data specified by the effect change image data specifying means from the effect change image data storage means.
This eliminates the process of combining the two images when displaying the combined image of the effect image and the image of the identification information, and the identification information combined with the effect image can be displayed. A variable display image can be displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect, it is possible to change the size of the display image based on the size specified by the size specifying means, and it is possible to display a variable display image rich in change.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at approximately the center position of the game area. Below the first special symbol display device 4A, there is a variation in decorative symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display device 4A. A first image display device 5A capable of performing display or the like is provided. Below the second special symbol display device 4B, in correspondence with the special symbol variation display executed by the second special symbol display device 4B, variation of decorative symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other. A second image display device 5B capable of performing display or the like is provided.

  Below the first image display device 5A, an ordinary variable winning ball device (first start winning port) 6A is arranged. Below the second image display device 5B, a normal symbol display 20 and a normal variable winning ball device (second start winning port) 6B are arranged. The normal symbol display 20 is configured to include a light emitting diode (LED) or the like, and is lit, flashing, or colored in a normal diagram game in which the starting condition is that a game ball passes through a passing gate 21 provided in the game area. Etc. are controlled. When a display with a predetermined hit pattern is performed in this normal figure game, the display result in the normal figure game is “win”, and the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is passed for a predetermined time. Tilt control. Further, a first special variable winning ball device (first big winning port) 7A is arranged below the ordinary variable winning ball device 6A. Below the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, a second special variable winning ball apparatus (second large winning opening) 7B is arranged. A start winning memory display 10 is provided above the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B.

  The first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs. The first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, a variable display game (special game) that is executed based on the fact that a start condition (first start condition) is established by winning a game ball in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6A. A special symbol made up of numbers such as “0” to “9” is displayed. In the first special symbol display device 4A, after the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the previous special symbol game or the big hit gaming state by the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, the special symbol variation display is started. As a start condition (first start condition) is established, special symbol variation display is started. The second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, “0” to “0” in a special game that is executed based on a start condition (second start condition) established by winning a game ball in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. A special symbol composed of a numeral indicating “9” is displayed. In the second special symbol display device 4B, after the second start condition is satisfied, for example, when the previous special symbol game or the big hit gaming state by the second special symbol display device 4B is ended, the special symbol variation display is started. As a start condition (second start condition) is established, special symbol variation display is started. Here, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B controls the tilting of the movable wing piece of the electric tulip until a predetermined time elapses when the display result becomes a predetermined winning symbol in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol indicator 20. This makes it easier to win the game ball than when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position.

  In the special symbol game performed by the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the fixed special symbol that is the special symbol variable display result is stopped and displayed. (Derived display). At this time, when a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the specific gaming state by opening and closing the first special variable winning ball device 7A It becomes a big hit gaming state as. In this embodiment, a special symbol indicating the number “3” or “7” is a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating other numbers is a lost symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the opening / closing plate of the first special variable winning ball device 7A is set for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined time. It is opened in the period until the number of winning balls (for example, 10) is generated, and while it is being opened, it receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes it to make one round. finish. The round as the open / close cycle can be repeated up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 15 rounds).

  On the other hand, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the big special game state is established by opening and closing the second special variable winning ball device 7B. In the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the opening / closing plate of the second special variable winning ball device 7B is set for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or predetermined time. It is opened in the period until the number of winning balls (for example, 10) is generated, and while it is being opened, it receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes it to make one round. finish. The round as the open / close cycle can be repeated up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 15 rounds). Here, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a predetermined period (which is different from when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) For example, 45 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 15) of winning balls is generated, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is opened, and the round to be closed thereafter is a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 20 rounds). May be repeated.

  Thus, in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the special symbol game is started on the basis that different start conditions are satisfied. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the first and second It is controlled to the big hit gaming state by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7A, 7B.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol indicating “3” is a normal jackpot symbol, and the special symbol indicating “7” is a probability variable jackpot symbol. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special figure game, the probability variation jackpot is determined as a predetermined special display result. When a promising big hit is reached, after the big hit gaming state based on the probable big hit, the probability variation continues as one of the special gaming states until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) a special game is executed. It becomes a high probability state in which control (probability change control) is performed. In this high-probability state, the probability that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special game and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is improved as compared to the normal gaming state. Further, in the high probability state, control is performed so that the variation display time from the start of the special symbol variation display in the special figure game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol is shorter than that in the normal gaming state. Note that the normal gaming state is a gaming state other than the big hit gaming state or the special gaming state, and the probability that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special figure game is the initial value immediately after the power is turned on. It is controlled in the same way as the setting state.

  On the other hand, when the normal big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special figure game, the normal big hit is obtained. When the normal big hit is made, the probability variation control is not performed after the big hit gaming state is ended, so the probability that the variation display result in the special game becomes a big hit and is controlled to the big hit gaming state is not improved. In addition, after the big hit game state is ended with the normal big hit, after the big hit gaming state based on the normal big hit is finished, a special number of games (for example, 100 times) is executed or until the special figure is executed. Until the variation display result in the game becomes a big hit, as a special gaming state different from the high probability state, a time reduction state in which time reduction control (time reduction control) is continuously performed may be set. In the time reduction state where time reduction control is performed, the probability of being a big hit in each special figure game and being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the same as the normal gaming state, but the special symbol variable display time in the special figure game is normal. It is controlled to be shorter than the gaming state.

  In the high probability state and the time reduction state, the fluctuation display time in the normal diagram game by the normal symbol display device 20 is shorter than that in the normal game state, and the probability that the display result becomes a winning symbol in each normal diagram game is improved. To do. At this time, the tilting time of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is longer than that in the normal gaming state, and the number of tilts is increased compared to that in the normal gaming state. Thus, in the high probability state and the time reduction state, a gaming state advantageous to the player, which is different from the big hit gaming state, is obtained. Here, in the time shortening state, the probability variation control is not performed, and the probability that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special figure game is the same as in the normal gaming state, so the time in the high probability state is shortened. It is more advantageous for the player than the state.

  Further, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A performs variable display using 10 kinds of symbols indicating the numbers “0” to “9” as special symbols, while the second special symbol display device 4B performs “A” to “J”. 10 types of symbols indicating the alphabet “” may be displayed in a variable manner as special symbols. Alternatively, each of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may variably display a plurality of types of character symbols related to different motifs as special symbols.

  The first and second image display devices 5A and 5B may be configured by, for example, an LCD or the like and perform image display by a dot matrix method using a large number of pixels (pixels). The display screen of the first image display device 5A is divided into, for example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” in accordance with the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. In the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR as the displayed areas, a variable display image of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be distinguished from each other is displayed. That is, in the first image display device 5A, a decorative symbol variation display image is displayed based on the first start condition being satisfied. On the display screen of the second image display device 5B, a plurality of types each of which can be identified by the variable display portions DL, DC, DR corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Display the variation display image of the decorative pattern. That is, in the second image display device 5B, the decorative display variation display image is displayed based on the fact that the second start condition different from the first start condition is satisfied.

  When a definite special symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol variation display result in the first special symbol display device 4A after the decorative symbol variation display (for example, switching display or scroll display) in the first image display device 5A is started. In the first image display device 5A, the decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols) that become the fixed symbols are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR, whereby the variation of the decorative symbols stops. When the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol variation display result in the second special symbol display device 4B after the decorative symbol variation display in the second image display device 5B is started, in the second image display device 5B. The fixed decorative symbols are derived and displayed in the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR, so that the variation of the decorative symbols is stopped.

  In the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR in each of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, for example, 10 types of symbols indicating the number # 1 of “0” to “9” as shown in FIG. One symbol array is formed, and switching display or scroll display is performed from the one with the largest number indicated by the symbol to the one with the smaller number. When the symbol indicating the number “0” is displayed, the number “9” is displayed next. By displaying the decorative design, the decorative display of the decorative design # 1 is displayed. Each of the decorative symbols # 1 is given a symbol number corresponding to each decorative symbol, for example, the same number as the number indicated by each symbol.

  When the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by any one of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B is a big hit symbol, that is, when a big hit occurs, the first and second image displays corresponding to the special symbol game As a display result of the variable display of decorative symbols executed by any of the devices 5A and 5B, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR. Therefore, the same decorative design is stopped and displayed on each of the variable display units DL, DC, and DR as a display result of the decorative display of the decorative design executed by any of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. In some cases, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state on the assumption that the specific display result is derived and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as a specific example, when a probability variation big hit is generated, which is a probability variation big winning symbol indicating that the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is “7”, a decorative symbol # executed in accordance with the special symbol game is executed. Of the symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, or “9”, the fixed decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR by one variable display A combination of the same symbols selected from That is, among the decorative symbols # 1, the symbol indicating “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, or “9” is used as a decorative symbol (probability variable symbol) for probability variation big hit. In addition, when a normal big hit occurs in which the final special symbol in the special game is “3”, the variable display units DL and DC are displayed by the variable display of the decorative symbols executed corresponding to the special game. The confirmed decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the DR are combinations of the same symbols selected from the symbols indicating the numbers “0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, or “8”. That is, among the decorative symbols # 1, the symbol indicating the number “0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, or “8” is used as a normal jackpot decorative symbol (normal symbol).

  Decorative design # 1 is the same decorative design (number) as indicated by a horizontal arrow in FIG. 2 by switching the animation variation index number within the range of “1” to “5”. In addition, animation variation display is performed in which the display mode (pattern) of the pattern gradually changes like an animation as time passes. At this time, the decorative pattern # 1 is configured with different display modes (patterns) depending on the difference in game value, such as whether or not the jackpot is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot ends. . FIG. 3A shows an example of the animation variation pattern of the decorative pattern # 1 indicating the number “8” as a normal symbol, and FIG. 3B shows the number “7” as a probability variable symbol. An example of the animation variation mode of the pattern in the decorative pattern # 1 is shown. As shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the animation variation mode of the pattern in each of the decorative symbols # 1 is different depending on whether it is a normal symbol or a probable variation symbol. In this way, by changing the pattern itself or the animation variation mode of the pattern depending on whether it is a normal symbol or a probable variation symbol, it is possible to display a decorative symbol rich in performance.

  Further, in the variable display portions DL, DC, DR in each of the first and second image display devices 5A, 5B, for example, an image indicating the number # 2 of “0” to “9” as shown in FIG. ”,“ Panda ”,“ Cat ”,“ Hippo ”,... And other images indicating the character # 1 are combined to form one symbol array, and the symbol number is large. The display is switched or scrolled from small to large, and when the symbol “0” and the symbol “Koala” are displayed, the symbol “9” and the symbol “fox” are displayed. Is displayed, the decorative pattern # 2 is displayed in a variable manner. Each of the decorative symbols # 2 is also given a symbol number corresponding to each decorative symbol, like each of the decorative symbols # 1.

  When the variation display of the decorative symbol # 2 is executed corresponding to the special symbol game when the probability variable big symbol which becomes the probability variable big bonus symbol indicating “7” in the special symbol game is generated, this ornament is displayed. The fixed decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR by the variable display of symbol # 2 are the numbers # 2 of “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, or “9”. A combination of the same symbols selected from symbols indicating the corresponding character # 1. That is, among the decorative symbols # 2, the symbol indicating the number # 2 of “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” or “9” and the character # 1 corresponding thereto is used as a probability variable symbol. It is done. In addition, when the normal big hit that becomes the normal big hit symbol in which the determined special symbol in the special figure game is “3” occurs, when the variation display of the decorative symbol # 2 is executed corresponding to the special figure game, The fixed decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR by the variable display of the decorative symbols # 2 are the numbers # 0, “2”, “4”, “6”, or “8”. Suppose that the combination of the same symbols selected from the symbols indicating 2 and the corresponding character # 1. That is, among the decorative symbols # 2, the symbol indicating the number # 2 of “0”, “2”, “4”, “6” or “8” and the corresponding character # 1 is used as a normal symbol. It is done.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 5, the decorative pattern # 2 is switched within the range of the animation fluctuation index number “1” to “10”, so that even if the same decorative pattern (number and character) is used, As the time progresses, the animation fluctuation display is performed in which the direction and viewpoint of the symbol change like an animation.

  Furthermore, in each of the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR in each of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, for example, a ring-shaped image arranged at the peripheral portion that becomes the first portion as shown in FIG. A composite image of sprite # 1 (numbered ring) indicating a combination of numbers and sprite # 2 (character # 2 or character # 3) indicating a character image arranged in the center serving as the second part is displayed as a decoration. Displayed as symbol # 3. For example, as shown in FIG. 7A, the sprite # 1 includes an image (sprite) having a plurality of display modes that can be displayed on the first part. As for the sprite # 2, as in the decorative pattern # 2, there are two types of images (in order to perform different animation fluctuation display) for each character associated with the numbers “0” to “9”. For example, character # 2 shown in FIG. 7B and character # 3 shown in FIG. 7C are prepared in advance. Even if the animation variation display of the character # 3 shown in FIG. 7C is the same type of character (for example, any one of “koala”, “panda”, “cat”, “hippo”, etc.). The image change of the character # 2 (the movement that moves in FIG. 7B) is different from the image change (the movement that moves in FIG. 7C).

  When the variation display of the decorative symbol # 3 is executed corresponding to the special symbol game when the probability variable big symbol which becomes the probability variable big bonus symbol indicating “7” in the special symbol game is generated, this ornament is displayed. A number indicating a number of “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, or “9” as a fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed on each variable display portion DL, DC, DR by the variable display of symbol # 3 A combination of the same symbols selected from the symbols consisting of the sprite # 1 of the attached ring and the corresponding sprite # 2. That is, sprite # 1 of a ring with a number indicating the number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” or “9” in the decorative pattern # 3 and the corresponding character # 2 or character # A symbol composed of sprite # 2 indicating 3 is used as a probability variable symbol. In addition, when the normal big hit that becomes the normal big hit symbol in which the determined special symbol in the special figure game is “3” occurs, when the variation display of the decorative symbol # 3 is executed corresponding to the special figure game, As a result of the variable display of the decorative pattern # 3, a fixed decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed on each of the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR is represented by a number “0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, or “8”. The combination of the same symbols selected from the symbols consisting of the sprite # 1 and the corresponding sprite # 2 of the numbered ring shown. That is, sprite # 1 of a ring with a number indicating the number “0”, “2”, “4”, “6” or “8” in the decorative pattern # 3, and the corresponding character # 2 or character # Sprite # 2 indicating 3 is normally used as a symbol.

  In the decorative pattern # 3, as shown in FIG. 8A, there is a pattern (a composite image of sprite # 1 that is an image of a ring with a number and a character # 2) that is not accompanied by animation fluctuation. On the other hand, it is also possible to display an image as shown in FIG. 8C by synthesizing a ring effect image with animation fluctuation as shown in FIG. 8B.

  The display of the decorative symbols # 1 to # 3 as described above corresponds to the variation pattern in the variation display when, for example, the variation display of the ornament symbols is started in each of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. Can be switched. More specifically, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in each of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, one of the decorative symbols # 1 to # 3 corresponding to the variable pattern in each variable display Check if is displayed. At this time, when the type of the displayed decorative pattern does not correspond to the variation pattern, for example, while performing the fade-out display that gradually increases the transparency of the displayed decorative pattern over time By performing fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is lowered step by step, the one corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed among the decorative symbols # 1 to # 3. You can do it.

  The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6A is always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) having a pair of movable wing pieces that are controlled to move from a vertical (normally open) position to a tilted (expanded open) position by a solenoid (not shown). It is prepared for. When the display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 becomes a winning symbol, the movable wing piece of the tulip is controlled to tilt until a predetermined time elapses, so that the movable wing piece is set to a vertical position. This makes it easier for game balls to win. When a game ball flowing down the game area wins the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6A, the gaming ball is detected by the first start winning port switch 41a (FIG. 9), thereby satisfying the first start condition. When a game ball flowing down the game area wins the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start winning port switch 41b (FIG. 9), and the second start condition is satisfied.

  Each of the first and second special variable winning ball devices 7A and 7B includes an opening / closing plate that opens and closes a winning area by a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing plate is in a closed state at a normal time, for example, before the big hit gaming state occurs after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. On the other hand, when a big hit gaming state is achieved based on the variation display result in the special game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the winning area is set for a predetermined period or a predetermined number of winning balls by the solenoid. After opening in the period until the occurrence of, close. When the first and second special variable winning ball devices 7A and 7B open the opening / closing plate and the game ball is won in the winning area, the gaming ball is detected by a predetermined large winning opening switch. Based on this, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

  The start winning memory display 10 is composed of, for example, an LED or the like, and a game ball wins the normal variable winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the stored contents of the special figure storage unit 121 (FIG. 23). Although the start condition (one of the first and second start conditions) for executing the special figure game by any one of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B is established, The start winning memory number (holding memory number) that does not satisfy the start condition (either the first or second start condition) for starting the variable display due to reasons such as being executed is displayed. For example, in the start winning memory display 10, a number of LEDs corresponding to the number of reserved memories of special figure games by the first and second special symbol display devices 4 </ b> A and 4 </ b> B are lit.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill with a built-in lamp, an outlet, and the like. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11, a display control board 12, and a signal relay board 13 as shown in FIG. 9 are mounted. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a power supply board for supplying power supply voltage, a payout control board, and an information terminal board.

  The main board 11 and the display control board 12 are arranged at appropriate positions on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and display control INT signal signals for transmitting and receiving, for example, display control signal lines and strobe signals between the two boards. Wires are wired. The display control board 12 may be arranged independently of the sound control board, the lamp control board, or the like, or may be configured as a single display control board in which these boards are combined. May be.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, a display control board 12 and the like. Each has a function of outputting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 performs special control in the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B by performing on / off control of each segment LED constituting the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B. Control the display of fluctuations. In addition, the main board 11 may control the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 20 by performing lighting / flashing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20.

  A control signal output from the main board 11 toward the display control board 12 is relayed by the signal relay board 13. The main board 11 is provided with, for example, a main board side connector corresponding to the signal relay board 13, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the display control board 12 via the signal relay board 13 and prevents the signal from being input from the signal relay board 13 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the display control board 12 or the signal relay board 13 side to the main board 11 side.

  The signal relay board 13 is provided with a transmission direction regulating circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal output from the main board 11 to the display control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulating circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to a main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to a display control board connector corresponding to the display control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can block the signal input from the display control board 12 to the signal relay board 13 and allow the signal to pass only in the direction from the main board 11 to the display control board 12. . Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the display control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In order to prevent unauthorized input of signals to the main board, a one-way data transfer means that restricts only the signal output from the main board to the sub board between the main board and the sub board has already been proposed. (See, for example, JP-A-8-224339). However, since there is nothing that restricts signal input to the main board between the main board and the one-way data transfer means, it is possible to input illegal signals to the main board by modifying the one-way data transfer means. Was possible. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the signal relay board 13, and an output buffer is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing the circuit, it is possible to more reliably prevent an illegal signal input from the outside to the main board 11.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the display control board 12 via the signal relay board 13 is, for example, a display control command transmitted as an electric signal. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the display control command used in this embodiment. The display control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 10 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In this embodiment, as display control commands, first and second variable display start commands, first and second special symbol notification commands, corresponding to the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, respectively. First and second change display end commands and the like are prepared in advance. In addition, it is transmitted when the big hit gaming state is ended after being controlled to the big hit gaming state due to the big hit in the special figure game by one of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A, 4B. A jackpot end command is also prepared in advance.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, commands 8000H to 80XXH are first variation display start commands transmitted when the variation display of special symbols is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. Note that XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the display control command. Commands 8100H to 81XXH are second variation display start commands transmitted when the variation display of special symbols is started in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The first and second variation display start commands are, for example, the variation display time of the special symbol, which is the time from when the variation display of the special symbol is started until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the variation result of the special symbol game. The type of display result, such as whether the display will be a promising big hit, a normal big hit, or a loss. EXT data indicating whether or not normal loss occurs.

  Here, “reach” refers to a decorative symbol (not yet derived and displayed when the decorative symbol derived and displayed by one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B constitutes a part of the jackpot combination. Reach variation design) is a display mode in which the variable display is performed, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols are synchronously displayed while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol It is. Specifically, on the combination effective line that has not been stopped yet when the symbols constituting the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed on some of the variable display portions on the predetermined combination effective line. A display mode in which variable display is performed in the variable display section (for example, “left”, “right” variable display section DL among DC, DR variable display sections DL, DC, DR, In DR, a display mode in which a part of the jackpot symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed, and the “medium” variable display unit DC is still displayed in a variable manner) or on the active line The display mode in which all or some of the decorative symbols of the variable display part of the variable display portion are synchronously variably displayed while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, “left”, “middle”, “right” variable display) Which part of DL, DC, DR is displayed in a variable manner Be displayed state is the same display mode change display is carried out in a manner decoration pattern are aligned). Also, during the reach, unusual effects may be performed with lamps or sounds. This production is called reach production. In addition, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a decorative design) is displayed, the background display mode is changed, or the decorative display variation display mode is changed. Sometimes. This change in character display, background display mode, and decorative pattern variation mode is referred to as reach effect display.

  The command 90XXH is a first special symbol notification command indicating the type of special symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (derived display) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 91XXH is a second special symbol notification command indicating the type of special symbol that is finally stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. As described above, the special symbol includes the normal jackpot symbol, the probability variation jackpot symbol, and the loss symbol. For example, the command 9000H and the command 9100H indicate that the probability variation jackpot symbol, In the special control game, the first and second special symbol notification commands are used on the display control board 12 side to indicate that the symbol is normally a big hit symbol and that the command 9002H and the command 9102H indicate a loss symbol. It is possible to identify whether the type of the result is a probable big hit, a normal big hit or a loss.

  The command 9800H is a first variation display end command transmitted when the special symbol display is derived and displayed in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation display of the special symbol is terminated. The command 9900H is a second variation display end command transmitted when a special symbol is derived and displayed in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B and the variation display of the special symbol is terminated.

  The main board 11 shown in FIG. 9 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 107, and the like. The game control microcomputer 100 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is controlled according to a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 used as a work memory, and the program. A CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs operations, a random number circuit 104 that generates random numbers independently of the CPU 103, and an I / O (Input / Output) port 105 are included. The switch circuit 107 takes in the detection signal from each winning opening switch 70 and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data as various random numbers used for controlling the progress of the game. As a specific example, the CPU 103 sets a random number generation operation by the random number circuit 104 and updates the numerical data regularly (or irregularly) according to a predetermined procedure. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for jackpot determination, a random value MR2 for reach determination, a random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, and a random for random determination determination The numerical value data indicating the numerical value MR4, the random value MR5 for determining the special symbol determined at the time of losing, and the random value MR6 for determining the continuous performance execution are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR6. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR6 by updating with software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104.

  The random number MR1 for jackpot determination is a random value used for determining whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is put into a jackpot gaming state by generating a jackpot, for example, a range of “0” to “65535”. Takes the value of In other words, the jackpot determination random number MR1 is used to determine whether the type of variation display result in the special figure game is a jackpot or a loss. The random number MR2 for reach determination is executed by one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B corresponding to the special game when the confirmed special symbol does not become a big hit symbol in the special game. For display used to determine whether to display the fixed decorative pattern of the lost combination after deriving the variable display mode of the decorative pattern to be derived or whether to derive and display the fixed decorative pattern of the lost combination without reaching It is a random value and takes a value in the range of “0” to “1530”, for example.

  The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation display time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B and the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, respectively. This is a random number value for display used to determine the variation display mode of the decorative design corresponding to any of a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance, for example, a value in the range of “0” to “108” Take. The random number value MR4 for determining the probability variation is a random value used for determining whether the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is determined when the special game is determined to be a jackpot. It takes a value in the range of “0” to “9”. That is, the random number value MR4 for probability variation determination is used to determine whether the type of variation display result in the special game is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. The random value MR5 for determining a special symbol for losing is a random value used for determining a special symbol to be derived and displayed as a final symbol when it is determined that the game is to be lost in the special game. For example, a value in the range of “0” to “399” is taken. The random value MR6 for determining the execution of the continuous effect is displayed in a variable display by the second image display device 5B a plurality of times when it is determined to be lost in the special game by the first special symbol display device 4A. This is a random value used to determine whether or not to execute a continuous effect in which an effect display by displaying predetermined notification information is displayed while the decorative design is reduced and displayed, for example, “0” to “99”. Take a value in the range.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. The decision table is a big hit decision table that is referred to for determining whether or not the variable display result is a big hit with the special symbol confirmed in the special figure game as a big hit symbol, or whether or not the probability change big hit is normal. A probability variation determination table and the like referred to for determining whether or not the jackpot is determined are included.

  As a specific example of the jackpot determination table stored in the ROM 101, in this embodiment, a normal jackpot determination table 110 shown in FIG. 12A and a probability change jackpot determination table 111 shown in FIG. Prepared in advance. Each of the normal big hit determination table 110 and the probability change big hit determination table 111 is a setting data for associating a determination result indicating whether the variation display result in the special figure game is a big hit or lost with the random number MR1 for the big hit determination. Etc. In the probability change big hit determination table 111, more random number values MR1 are assigned to the “big hit” determination result than in the normal big hit determination table 110. That is, in the high probability state, the fluctuation display result in the special figure game is determined using the probability variation big hit determination table 111, and the fluctuation display result in the special figure game is determined using the normal big hit determination table 110. The probability that the variable display result is a big hit and is controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than that in the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal big hit determination table 110 shown in FIG. 2001 ”to“ 2184 ”are associated with the determination result indicating“ big hit ”. On the other hand, in the probability-change big hit determination table 111 shown in FIG. ”Is associated with a determination result indicating“ big hit ”.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes the fixed symbol determination table for determining the fixed special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variation display result in the special symbol game, and the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B. A variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern of symbols and the like in the variation display of decorative symbols by the special figure game and the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B is included. As an example of the confirmed symbol determination table stored in the ROM 101, a lost special symbol determination table 112 as shown in FIG. 13 is prepared in advance. The lost special symbol determination table 112 is composed of selection data that associates the symbol number of the special symbol with the random value MR5 for determining the special symbol for loss.

  The variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101 makes it possible to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern determination random value MR3, for example, by associating each variation pattern with the variation pattern determination random value MR3. What is necessary is just to be comprised from selection data etc. In this embodiment, in the normal game state other than the special game state and the specific game state, the variation pattern of the decoration pattern is derived as a variation pattern for deriving and displaying the definite decorative pattern of the combination of combinations without reaching the variation display mode of the decoration symbol. Is prepared. In addition, a plurality of types of reach-losing variation patterns are prepared as reach-losing variation patterns for deriving and displaying a definitive decorative symbol of a combination of loses without making a big hit after setting the variation display mode of the decorative symbols as reach. As a variation pattern for deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol as a definite special symbol in the special game, and deriving and displaying the jackpot combination decoration symbol, a plurality of types of variation patterns for the big hit are prepared. The data indicating each variation pattern in the variation pattern determination table is, for example, data indicating the variation display time of the special symbol in the variation pattern determination table or a variation pattern setting table different from the variation pattern determination table, The first and second variation display start commands are associated with control data set as EXT data.

  FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of the variation pattern table 113 as an example of a variation pattern setting table. The variation pattern table 113 is a setting for associating, for example, a plurality of types of variation patterns, variation display time (total variation time) of special symbols, and control data set as EXT data of the first and second variation display start commands. It consists of data. In this embodiment, for example, the variation patterns corresponding to the normal loss include the variation pattern B1 (normal loss), O (normal loss), P (normal loss), α1 (normal loss) to α3 (normal loss), β1. Normal loss variation patterns such as (normal loss) to β3 (normal loss), γ1 (normal loss), γ2 (normal loss), and δ1 (normal loss) to δ3 (normal loss) normal loss patterns are prepared. . Further, as variation patterns corresponding to reach loss, variation patterns A1 (reach lose) to A3 (reach lose), B1 (reach lose), C1 (reach lose) to C3 (reach lose), D (reach lose), α1 (reach lose), α3 ( Reach loss variation patterns such as reach loss patterns, reach loss, β1 (reach lose) to β3 (reach lose), and δ1 (reach lose) to δ3 (reach lose) are prepared. Fluctuation patterns corresponding to big hits such as probability big hit and normal big hit are fluctuation patterns A1 (big hit) to A3 (big hit), B1 (big hit), C1 (big hit), C3 (big hit), D (big hit), α1 (big hit) Big hit time fluctuation patterns are prepared, such as big hit patterns of .alpha.3 (big hit), .beta.1 (big hit), .beta.3 (big hit), .gamma.1 (big hit), .gamma.2 (big hit), .delta.1 (big hit) to .delta.3 (big hit).

  The variation display times of the special symbols in the variation patterns A1 (reach lose) to A3 (reach lose) are Ti0, Ti1, and Ti2, respectively. The variation display times of the special symbols in the variation patterns B1 (normal loss) and B1 (reach loss) are Ti8 and Ti9, respectively. The variation display times of the special symbols in the variation patterns C1 (normal loss) to C3 (normal loss) are Ti10, Ti11, and Ti12, respectively. The variation display time of the special symbol in the variation pattern D (reach lose) is Ti18. The variation display times of the special symbols in the variation patterns O (normal loss) and P (normal loss) are Ti38 and Ti39, respectively. The variation display times of the special symbols in the variation patterns α1 (normally lost) to α3 (normally lost), α1 (reach lost), and α3 (reach lost) are Ti40, Ti41, Ti42, Ti43, and Ti44, respectively. The variation display times of the special symbols in the variation patterns β1 (normally lost) to β3 (normally lost) and β1 (reach lost) to β3 (reach lost) are Ti50, Ti51, Ti52, Ti53, Ti54, and Ti55, respectively. The variation display times of the special symbols in the variation patterns γ1 (normal loss) and γ2 (normal loss) are Ti58 and Ti59, respectively. The variation display times of the special symbols in the variation patterns δ1 (normal loss) to δ3 (normal loss) and δ1 (reach loss) to δ3 (reach loss) are Ti60, Ti61, Ti62, Ti63, Ti64, and Ti65, respectively.

  Here, the variation display time Ti52 of the special symbol in the variation pattern β3 (normal loss) is determined to be longer than the variation display time Ti51 of the special symbol in the variation pattern β2 (normal loss). The variation display time Ti51 of the special symbol in the pattern β2 (normal loss) is set to be longer than the variation display time Ti50 of the special symbol in the variation pattern β1 (normal loss). The variation display time Ti55 of the special symbol in the variation pattern β3 (reach loss) is determined to be longer than the variation display time Ti54 of the special symbol in the variation pattern β2 (reach loss), and the variation pattern β2 (reach loss) The special symbol variation display time Ti53 is set to be longer than the special symbol variation display time Ti54 in the variation pattern β1 (reach lose). Further, the variation display time Ti62 of the special symbol in the variation pattern δ3 (normal loss) is determined to be longer than the variation display time Ti61 of the special symbol in the variation pattern δ2 (normal loss). The special symbol fluctuation display time Ti61 in δ2 (normal loss) is determined to be longer than the special symbol fluctuation display time Ti60 in the fluctuation pattern δ1 (normal loss). The variation display time Ti65 of the special symbol in the variation pattern δ3 (reach loss) is set to be longer than the variation display time Ti64 of the special symbol in the variation pattern δ2 (reach loss), and the variation pattern δ2 (reach loss) The special symbol variation display time Ti64 is set to be longer than the special symbol variation display time Ti63 in the variation pattern δ1 (reach lose).

  The variation display times of the special symbols in the variation patterns A1 (big hit) to A3 (big hit) are Ti70, Ti71, and Ti72, respectively. The variation display time of the special symbol in the variation pattern B1 (big hit) is Ti78. The special symbol fluctuation display times in the fluctuation patterns C1 (big hit) to C3 (big hit) are Ti80, Ti81, and Ti82, respectively. The variation display time of the special symbol in the variation pattern D (big hit) is Ti88. The variation display times of the special symbols in the variation patterns α1 (big hit) to α3 (big hit) are Ti100, Ti101, and Ti102, respectively. The variation display times of the special symbols in the variation patterns β1 (big hit) to β3 (big hit) are Ti110, Ti111, and Ti112, respectively. The variation display times of the special symbols in the variation patterns γ1 (big hit) and γ2 (big hit) are Ti118 and Ti119, respectively. The variation display times of the special symbols in the variation patterns δ1 (big hit) to δ3 (big hit) are Ti120, Ti121, and Ti122, respectively.

  Here, the variation display time Ti112 of the special symbol in the variation pattern β3 (big hit) is determined to be longer than the variation display time Ti111 of the special symbol in the variation pattern β2 (big hit), and the variation pattern β2 The special symbol fluctuation display time Ti111 in (big hit) is determined to be longer than the special symbol fluctuation display time Ti110 in fluctuation pattern β1 (big hit). The special symbol variation display time Ti122 in the variation pattern δ3 (big hit) is set to be longer than the special symbol variation display time Ti121 in the variation pattern δ2 (big hit), and the variation pattern δ2 ( The special symbol fluctuation display time Ti121 in the big hit is set to be longer than the special symbol fluctuation display time Ti120 in the fluctuation pattern δ1 (big hit).

  Furthermore, the special symbol variation display time Ti18 in the variation pattern D (reach loss) and the special symbol variation display time Ti88 in the variation pattern D (big hit) are the special symbol variation display times Ti0 to Ti17, Ti19 in other variation patterns. ~ Ti87 and Ti89 ~ Ti122 are set in advance so as to have a sufficiently long time. For example, after the special symbol game is executed once with the fluctuation pattern D and the special symbol fluctuation display is started, the fixed symbol is started. Within a period until the display is stopped, the special symbol variation display by another variation pattern can be executed a plurality of times. Further, the special symbol variation display time Ti39 in the variation pattern P (normally lost) is determined in advance so as to be shorter than the special symbol variation display times Ti0 to Ti38 and Ti40 to Ti122 in the other variation patterns. ing.

  In the variation patterns A1 to A3, the decorative design # 1 (the image of the number # 1) shown in FIG. 2 or the like is used regardless of whether it is a big hit pattern or a reach lose pattern. In the variation pattern B1, regardless of whether it is a big hit pattern, a reach loss pattern, or a normal loss pattern, the decorative pattern # 2 (the combination of the image of the number # 2 and the image of the character # 1 shown in FIG. 4) ) Is used. In the variation patterns C1 to C3, regardless of whether the pattern is a big hit pattern or a reach loss pattern, the decorative pattern # 3 (sprite # 1 with a numbered ring and the sprite of the character # 2 or the character # 3) shown in FIG. In combination with # 2).

  For example, in the variation pattern A1, the decorative pattern is decorated in such a manner that three decorative symbols # 1 can be simultaneously displayed on each of the variable display portions DL, DC, DR in either of the first and second image display devices 5A, 5B. Variation display of symbol # 1 is started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 15 (A), the display is stopped in a state where the decorative symbols # 1 are displayed in the vertical direction on the variable display portions DL and DR of “left” and “right”, respectively. Of the active lines (for example, a total of five active lines including three combination effective lines in the upper, middle, and lower stages in the horizontal direction and two combination effective lines on the diagonal line) All together, reach is established. In the example shown in FIG. 15A, a symbol indicating the highest “7” in the “left” variable display portion DL and a symbol indicating the lowest “7” in the variable display portion DR on the “right”. , The diagonal lines (the diagonal line connecting the upper left and the lower right) are aligned on the effective line. Thereafter, in the “middle” variable display portion DC, three decorative symbols # 1 are displayed in the vertical direction and are changed, and finally the big hit or the loss is determined.

  In the variation pattern A2, as in the variation pattern A1, after the variation display of the decorative symbol # 1 is started in each variable display portion DL, DC, DR, for example, as shown in FIG. In addition, the display is stopped in a state in which decorative symbols # 1 are displayed three by three in the vertical direction on the variable display portions DL and DR on the “right”, and the symbols on any of the effective lines are aligned to establish reach. In the example shown in FIG. 15B, a symbol indicating the highest “7” in the “left” variable display portion DL and a symbol indicating the lowest “7” in the variable display portion DR of “right”. , The diagonal lines (the diagonal line connecting the upper left and the lower right) are aligned on the effective line. Thereafter, in the variation pattern A2, the variable display portion DC of “medium” varies while only one decorative symbol # 1 is displayed, and finally, the big hit or the loss is determined.

  In the variation pattern A3, similarly to the variation patterns A1 and A2, after the variation display of the decorative symbol # 1 is started in each variable display portion DL, DC, DR, for example, as shown in FIG. Stops in the state where decorative symbols # 1 are displayed in the vertical direction on the left and right variable display portions DL and DR, respectively, and stops one of the two effective lines on the diagonal line. Reach is established with the above symbols. In the example shown in FIG. 15C, a symbol indicating the highest “7” in the “left” variable display portion DL and a symbol indicating the lowest “7” in the variable display portion DR on the “right”. , The diagonal lines (the diagonal line connecting the upper left and the lower right) are aligned on the effective line. Thereafter, in the variation pattern A3, the size of the “middle” variable display portion DC is adjusted to a size capable of displaying the decorative pattern # 1 of about 6.5 pieces, and in such a “middle” variable display portion DC. The decorative pattern # 1 changes from right to left in the horizontal direction, and finally a big hit or lose is determined.

  In the variation pattern B1, a decorative design # composed of a number # 2 and a character # 1 (animal) is displayed on each variable display portion DL, DC, DR in any of the first and second image display devices 5A, 5B. 2 fluctuation display is started. At this time, the animation variation display of each decorative symbol # 2 is not performed. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the decorative symbol # 2 that has changed in the downward direction, which is the first change direction, stops at the “left” variable display portion DL. In the example shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the combination of the number # 2 indicating “3” and the character # 1 indicating “horse” is displayed in a deceleration stop mode. At this time, the animation variation display is performed as if the decorative pattern # 2 is bouncing. For example, the fluctuating display is performed such that the decorative pattern # 2 scrolled downward is bounced by colliding with the ground displayed as the background.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, “3” is indicated at the reference position ZA as shown in FIG. 16A from the state in which the scroll is displayed in the downward direction as the first fluctuation direction. After the decorative pattern # 2 that is a combination of the character # 1 indicating the number # 2 and the “horse” is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 16B, it is scroll-displayed in the upward direction as the second fluctuation direction. As a result, the display position changes to the display position ZB1. Thereafter, by scrolling again in the downward direction, which is the first fluctuation direction, as shown in FIG. 16C, a display is returned to the reference position ZA that is the final stop position.

  Subsequently, in the variation pattern B1, for example, as shown in FIGS. 16D to 16F, the decorative pattern # that has varied in the downward direction as the first variation direction in the “right” variable display portion DR. 2 stops. In the example shown in FIGS. 16D to 16F, the combination of the number # 2 indicating “4” and the character # 1 indicating “cover” is displayed in a deceleration stop manner. At this time, decorative symbol # 2 which is a combination of numeral # 2 indicating “4” and character # 1 indicating “cover” at the reference position ZA as shown in FIG. As shown in E), the display position is changed to the display position ZB2 as if it is bounced by being scroll-displayed in the upward direction as the second change direction. Thereafter, by scrolling again downward in the first fluctuation direction, as shown in FIG. 16 (F), display returning to the reference position ZA that is the final stop position is performed.

  Further, in the variation pattern B1, the decorative symbol # 2 that has been varied downward in the first variation direction is stopped at the “medium” variable display unit DC, and the variation pattern B1 is displayed as if it has jumped. . Finally, when the three decorative symbols # 2 are stopped in combination with the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR, a big hit or a loss is determined. Here, the position (return position ZB) that is reached when each decorative symbol # 2 jumps upward in the variation pattern B1, for example, indicates an animal that is generally recognized as having a weight among the characters # 1, for example. Each symbol included in the decorative symbol # 2 is designated in advance so that the return position is low (the return amount is small). Return position data for specifying the distance between the reference position ZA and the return position ZB is set in advance in association with each symbol included in the decorative symbol # 2, for example, as shown in FIG. Is stored in a predetermined area or the like of the ROM 131 (FIG. 23).

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, for character # 1 indicating a small small animal such as “koala”, “raccoon dog”, “fox” (corresponding to number # 2 indicating “0”, “8”, “9”). The return amount (number of dots) is designated as “110”, and the return amount (number of dots) is “100” for character # 1 indicating “panda” (corresponding to the number # 2 indicating “1”). For character # 1 indicating “tiger”, “horse” (corresponding to number # 2 indicating “2”, “3”), the return amount (number of dots) is specified as “90”, For character # 1 indicating a heavy animal such as “cover” (corresponding to numeral # 2 indicating “4”), the return amount (number of dots) is designated as “70”. Thus, the character # 1 indicating an animal that is generally recognized as being large and heavy is set so that the return position is lower (return amount is smaller). Accordingly, as apparent from a comparison between FIGS. 16B and 16E, the return position in the decorative design # 2 composed of the number # 2 indicating “3” combined with the character # 1 indicating “horse”. The position on the screen is higher than the return position in the decorative pattern # 2 composed of the number # 2 indicating “4” combined with the character # 1 indicating “cover”. That is, the distance between the reference position ZA and the return position ZB1 is larger than the distance between the reference position ZA and the return position ZB2.

  In the variation pattern B1, animation variation display is not performed in a period in which scroll display is performed in the downward direction, which is the first variation direction, after the variation of the decorative pattern # 2 is started. On the other hand, in a period in which the state of decelerating immediately before the reference position ZA is fluctuating from the state where the reference position ZA jumps to the reference position ZA again, images with different display modes are sequentially switched and displayed. For the number # 2 and the character # 1, the animation fluctuation display is performed in which the design gradually changes with time.

  In the variation pattern C1, first, as shown in FIG. 18A, for example, three decorative designs are respectively provided in each of the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR in the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. Variation display of decorative symbol # 3 is started in such a manner that # 3 can be displayed simultaneously. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 18A1 to 18A5, the animation variation display of each symbol included in the decorative symbol # 3 is not performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 18 (B), the display is stopped in a state where decorative symbols # 3 are displayed in the vertical direction on the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR, and a plurality of symbols are displayed. The symbol on one of the effective lines (for example, a total of five effective lines including three combined effective lines in the upper, middle, and lower stages in the horizontal direction and two combined effective lines on the diagonal diagonal line) Together, reach is established. In the example shown in FIG. 18B, the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR are respectively composed of the character # 2 corresponding to the numbered rings “4”, “5”, and “6”. The decorative pattern # 3 is displayed on the active lines in the upper, middle, and lower stages. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 18C to 18H, in the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR, the three decorative symbols # 3 are stopped while “4” ”,“ 5 ”and“ 6 ”corresponding to the numbered rings“ # ”,“ monkey ”and“ elephant ”indicating character # 2 are displayed as animations.

  On the other hand, in the “middle” variable display portion DC, as shown in FIGS. 18C to 18H, the ring effect image is synthesized with the decorative pattern # 3 that is changing downward. Variation display using the formed composite image is performed. At this time, the animation change display of the character # 2 included in the decorative symbol # 3 changing in the “middle” variable display portion DC is not performed, but the decorative symbol # 3 is shown in FIG. “Explosion” as shown in FIG. 18, “smoke” as shown in FIG. 18D, “flaming up” as shown in FIGS. 18E to 18 G, “extinguishing” as shown in FIG. Such a ring effect image is sequentially synthesized, so that animation fluctuation display by the synthesized image is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (I), for example, the variable display portion DC of “middle” stops the display of the decorative symbol # 3, and finally, the big hit or the loss is determined.

  Also in the variation pattern C2, first, as shown in FIG. 19A, for example, three decorations are provided in each of the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR in either of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. The variation display of the decorative design # 3 is started in such a manner that the design # 3 can be displayed simultaneously. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 19A1 to 19A5, the animation variation display of each symbol included in the decorative symbol # 3 is not performed.

  Next, in the variation pattern C2, for example, as shown in FIG. 19B, the decorative symbol # 3 that has changed downward in the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL, DR is the same symbol. Stop at and reach is reached. At this time, the decorative symbol # 3 stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR is enlarged and displayed about 1.5 times in length and width. In the example shown in FIG. 19 (B), “left” and “right” variable display portions DL, DR are displayed together with decorative symbols # 3 including a numbered ring indicating “7”. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 19C to 19I, in the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR, “7” The animation change display of the character # 3 indicating the “lion” corresponding to the ring with the number “is performed. Subsequently, for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (I), the variation display of the decorative symbol # 3 is stopped at the “middle” variable display portion DC, and the big hit or the loss is finally determined.

  In the animation display of the decorative pattern # 3 in such a variation pattern C2, the character # 3 is used, and even with the same type of character, an image change different from the image change of the character # 2 is shown. For example, as shown in FIGS. 18C to 18H, the image change of the character # 2 in the decorative pattern # 3 stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR in the variation pattern C1. 19 (C) to (I), as shown in FIGS. 19 (C) to 19 (I), decorations stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR in the variation pattern C2. In the symbol # 3, a motion that is frightened by the image change of the character # 3 is expressed.

  Also in the variation pattern C3, first, as shown in FIG. 20A, for example, each variable display portion DL, DC, DR provided in the display region in any of the first and second image display devices 5A, 5B is displayed. Thus, the variable display of the decorative pattern # 3 is started in such a manner that three decorative patterns # 3 can be displayed simultaneously. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 19A1 to 19A5, the animation variation display of each symbol included in the decorative symbol # 3 is not performed.

  Next, in the variation pattern C3, for example, as shown in FIG. 20B, the decorative pattern # 3 is displayed in the vertical direction on the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR three by three. One of a plurality of effective lines (for example, a total of five effective lines including three combination effective lines in the upper, middle, and lower stages in the horizontal direction and two combination effective lines on the diagonal line). Reach is established with the symbols on the active line. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR are respectively composed of the character # 2 corresponding to the numbered rings “4”, “5”, and “6”. The decorative pattern # 3 is displayed on the effective lines in the upper, middle, and lower stages. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 20C to 20H, in the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR, as in the case of the variation pattern C1, three decorative symbols # 3 are provided. 3 is stopped, and animation of character # 2 indicating “horse”, “monkey”, and “elephant” corresponding to the numbered rings “4”, “5”, and “6” is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 20C to 20G, in the “middle” variable display portion DC, a synthesized image formed by synthesizing the ring effect image with the decorative pattern # 3 changing in the downward direction. Is displayed. At this time, the animation change display of the character # 2 included in the decorative symbol # 3 changing in the “middle” variable display portion DC is not performed, but the decorative symbol # 3 is shown in FIG. “Explosion” as shown in FIG. 18, “smoke” as shown in FIG. 18D, “flaming up” as shown in FIGS. 18E to 18 G, “extinguishing” as shown in FIG. Such a ring effect image is sequentially synthesized, so that animation fluctuation display by the synthesized image is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (I), for example, the variable display portion DC of “middle” stops the display of the decorative symbol # 3, and finally, the big hit or the loss is determined.

  On the other hand, in the “middle” variable display portion DC, as shown in FIGS. 20C to 20H, a ring effect image is synthesized with the decorative pattern # 3 that is changing downward. Variation display using the formed composite image is performed. At this time, the animation change display of the character # 3 included in the decorative symbol # 3 changing on the variable display portion DC of “medium” is performed, and the decorative symbol # 3 is shown in FIG. Such as “explosion”, “smoke” as shown in FIG. 20 (E), “flame” as shown in FIGS. 20 (F) and (G), “extinguishing” as shown in FIG. 20 (H), etc. By sequentially synthesizing the ring effect images, the animation variation display by the synthesized image is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 20 (I), for example, the variable display portion DC of “medium” stops the variable display of the decorative symbol # 3, and finally the big hit or the loss is determined. This is followed by an animation display of the decorative pattern # 3 that is derived and displayed in a predetermined period (for example, a period until the next change starts or a period until the display is changed to a demo display waiting for a customer).

  In addition, in the reach loss pattern and the normal loss pattern of the variation patterns α1 to α3 and β1 to β3, a predetermined pattern that is a part of a continuous effect executed as a first effect over a plurality of variable displays during a special symbol variation display. The effect display is performed in a predetermined effect mode.

  As a specific example, in the variation pattern α1, the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B displays the variation of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. As shown in FIG. 21 (A), the decorative design being displayed in a variable manner is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the display area. Then, an effect display is performed by displaying the notification information 60a at a display location generated by the reduced display. In the variation pattern α2, during the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B displays the variation pattern α2 in FIG. As shown in the figure, the decorative design is displayed in a reduced size, and an effect display is performed by displaying the notification information 60b. In the variation pattern α3, during the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B displays the variation pattern α3 in FIG. As shown, the decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced scale, and an effect display is performed by displaying the notification information 60c.

  In the variation patterns β1 to β3, during the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B performs FIG. ), The decorative design is displayed in a reduced size, and an effect display is performed by displaying the notification information 60d. In this embodiment, during the special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 4A, the first image display device 5A displays the variation variation of the decorative symbol and the effect display according to the variation pattern, It is assumed that during the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B, the second image display device 5B displays the decorative symbol variation display and the effect display according to the variation pattern.

  In the variation patterns γ1, γ2, and δ1 to δ3, during the special symbol variation display, a predetermined effect display that is the second effect is performed in an effect mode different from the continuous effect by the variation patterns α1 to α3 and β1 to β3. Is called.

  As a specific example, in the variation pattern γ1, the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B displays the variation of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The decorative design being displayed in a variable manner is displayed in a reduced size, and an image (still image or moving image) as shown in FIG. 21E is displayed as a display mode different from the notification information 60a to 60d using characters. The effect display is performed. In the variation pattern γ2, the decorative symbol being variably displayed on the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B during the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Is reduced and an effect display is performed by displaying an image as shown in FIG. In the variation patterns δ1 to δ3, during the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the variation display is being performed by the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. The decorative design is reduced and displayed, and an effect display is performed by displaying an image as shown in FIG.

  As a specific example of the variation pattern determination table, in this embodiment, the normal loss pattern determination table 114 shown in FIG. 22A, the reach loss pattern determination table 115 shown in FIG. 22B, and FIG. The big hit pattern determination table 116 shown in (C) is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101.

  The normal losing pattern determination table 114 shown in FIG. 22A shows numerical data generated in the random number circuit 104 or the like as the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern when the variation display result of the decorative symbol is normal loss. Based on the plurality of types of normal losing patterns, it is possible to select and determine a special figure game or a decorative pattern used for variable display. The reach-losing pattern determination table 115 shown in FIG. 22B has a plurality of types of reach-losing patterns based on numerical data generated as the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern when the decorative symbol variation display result is reached. Among them, a game to be used for a special game or a variation display of a decorative design can be selected and determined. The jackpot pattern determination table 116 shown in FIG. 22C has a plurality of types of jackpot patterns based on numerical data generated as a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern when the decorative symbol variation display result is a jackpot. Among them, a game to be used for a special game or a variation display of a decorative design can be selected and determined.

  Here, when the reach loss pattern determination table 115 and the big hit pattern determination table 116 are compared, the allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern for each variation pattern (reach type) is different. In other words, the ratio of the reach type to be selected differs depending on whether the display result in the special-figure game or the variation display of the decorative symbol is reach lose or a big hit. Thereby, the probability that the display result is a big hit will differ depending on the type of reach that appears during the special figure game. As described above, the probability that the display result determined for each reach type is a big hit is also referred to as a reach big hit reliability or simply a reach reliability.

  The RAM 102 shown in FIG. 9 is provided with a game control data holding area 120 as shown in FIG. 23, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 120 shown in FIG. 23 includes a special figure holding storage unit 121, a confirmed special symbol storage unit 122, a game control flag setting unit 123, a game control timer setting unit 124, and a game control counter setting unit. 125.

  The special figure holding storage unit 121 is a special figure game which is played by either the first or second special symbol display device 4A or 4B when a game ball wins one of the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The start condition for starting the variable display due to the reason that the previous special figure game is being executed even though the start condition (one of the first and second start conditions) is satisfied The hold information related to the special figure game in which either of the first and second start conditions is not established is stored. For example, the special figure storage unit 121 is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on establishment of a start condition by winning a game ball to either the normal variable winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The numerical data indicating the jackpot determination random number MR1 is stored in association with the hold number until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “8”) in the order in which the numerical data is extracted. In addition, the special figure storage unit 121 has a start winning opening data “first” indicating that a game ball has won the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6A serving as the first start winning opening, and a normal serving as the second starting winning opening. One of the start winning opening data “second” indicating that the game ball has won the variable winning ball device 6B is stored in association with the hold number together with the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for jackpot determination.

  The confirmed special symbol storage unit 122 stores data indicating a confirmed special symbol that is derived and displayed as a variation display result in the special symbol game. The game control flag setting unit 123 sets a plurality of types of flags that are set or cleared in accordance with the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the signal transmitted from each winning port switch 70 via the switch circuit 107, and the like. To store data. The game control timer setting unit 124 stores data indicating a plurality of types of timer values used for game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control counter setting unit 125 stores data indicating a plurality of types of count values used for game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The circuit used for flag setting and counter / timer may be constituted by a register circuit provided separately from the RAM 102.

  The game control flag setting unit 123 includes, for example, a special symbol process flag (first and second special symbol process flag) and a big hit flag (first flag) corresponding to each of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B. 1 and a second big hit flag), a probability change confirmation flag (a first and second probability change confirmation flag), and the like. In addition, the game control flag setting unit 123 is provided with a probability change flag, an effect mode flag, an effect pattern flag and the like.

  The first and second special symbol process flags are first and second special symbol process processes executed corresponding to the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, respectively (steps S16 and S17 in FIG. 37). In FIG. 5, the user designates which process should be selected and executed. The first and second big hit flags are determined that the variation display result in the special figure game is a big hit when the special figure game is started by each of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B. Then, the on state is set. On the other hand, when the big hit gaming state ends, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off. The first and second certainty change confirmation flags are used to determine that the variation display result in the special figure game is to be a promising big hit when starting the special figure game by the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, respectively. Is set to the on state. On the other hand, when the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability variation confirmation flag is cleared and turned off.

  The probable change flag is set to the big hit game state by being a big hit in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A, and then the first positive change confirmation flag is turned on when the big hit game state ends. Corresponding to being on, it is set to the on state. In addition, the probability change flag is set to the big hit game state by being a big hit in the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B, and then the second probability change confirmation flag is turned on when the big hit game state ends. Corresponding to the above, the on state is set. On the other hand, the probability variation flag is cleared and turned off when the high probability state is terminated, for example, when the count value in the probability variation counter becomes “0”.

  The effect mode flag instructs whether a continuous effect that is the first effect or an effect operation that is the second effect is performed during the variable display of the special symbol. For example, when neither the first effect nor the second effect is executed, the value of the effect mode flag is set to “0”. On the other hand, when the continuous effect as the first effect is executed, the value of the effect mode flag is set to “1”, and when the second effect different from the effect effect is executed, the value of the effect mode flag is set to “1”. 2 ".

  The effect pattern flag indicates the combination pattern of the effect display performed by the second image display device 5B during the variable display of the special symbol multiple times by the second special symbol display device 4B. Designate what kind of production will be executed. For example, if it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, if the variable display result of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is a big hit, the value of the effect pattern flag is set to “1”. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, if the variable display result of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is lost, the value of the effect pattern flag is “2” or “3”. Set to Here, whether the value of the effect pattern flag is set to “2” or “3” depends on whether the second image display device 5B displays the decorative pattern variably when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed. It is determined according to the determination result of whether or not the mode is reach. That is, when the variable display mode of decorative symbols by the second image display device 5B is set to reach, the value of the effect pattern flag is set to “2”. On the other hand, the value of the effect pattern flag is set to “3” in the case of deriving and displaying the lost symbol without setting the decorative display variable display mode by the second image display device 5B.

  In the game control timer setting unit 124, for example, variable time timers (first and second variable time timers) are provided corresponding to the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, respectively. The first variation time timer is for measuring the variation display time of the special symbol, which is the execution time of the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, on the main board 11 side. The second variation time timer is for measuring the variation display time of the special symbol, which is the execution time of the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, on the main board 11 side. For example, each of the first and second variation time timers is used as a down counter that stores a timer value corresponding to the remaining variation display time of the special symbol in the special symbol game and periodically counts down the timer value. In this case, a timer initial value corresponding to the variation pattern determined when the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started is set in the first variation time timer. In the second variation time timer, a timer initial value corresponding to the variation pattern determined when the variation display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started is set.

  The game control counter setting unit 125 is provided with, for example, a probability variation counter and an effect counter. The probability variation counter is for counting the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed in a high probability state where probability variation control is performed. In the probability variation counter, when the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the variation display result in the special figure game is a probability variation jackpot ends, the number of times of the special figure game that is predetermined to be executable in a high probability state (for example, Data indicating “100”) is set as the initial value of the variable display count during probability change. Each time a special game in which the variation display result is lost in the high probability state is executed, the count value in the probability variation counter is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted).

  The effect number counter is a counter that counts the number of special figure games started by the second special symbol display device 4B when the continuous effect is executed. When the count value of the effect number counter becomes the same as the predetermined number of continuous effects, the last symbol in the continuous effect is displayed when the special symbol is variably displayed in the special symbol game started by the second special symbol display device 4B. The production will be executed. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the number of continuous effects is set to “4”. In addition, the game control counter setting unit 125 counts the reserved memory number counter (first reserved memory number) based on the winning of the game ball to the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6A serving as the first start winning opening. And a second reserved memory number counter that counts the reserved memory number (second reserved memory number) based on the winning of the game ball to the normally variable winning ball device 6B serving as the second start winning opening.

  The display control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11 and controls display operations and the like in the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. For example, the display control board 12 causes the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B to perform switching display of images based on the display control command transmitted from the main board 11, and thereby the first and second special symbols. It is possible to produce effects by various displays during the special symbol variation display or the variation result display by the display devices 4A, 4B.

  FIG. 24 is a block diagram illustrating a hardware configuration example of the display control board 12. The display control board 12 includes a display control CPU 130, a ROM 131, a RAM 132, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 133, a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 134, a VRAM (Video RAM) 135, and LCD driving circuits 136A and 136B. It has. Note that a plurality of VDPs 133, CGROMs 134, and VRAMs 135 may be provided corresponding to each of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, or may be configured one by one.

  When the display control CPU 130 receives the display control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the signal relay board 13, the display control CPU 130 receives display control data for performing display control from the ROM 131 while using a predetermined area of the RAM 132 as a work area. read out. Based on the display control data thus read out, the display control CPU 130 controls the display of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B by sending a drawing command to the VDP 133.

  Further, the display control CPU 130 sets a random number generation operation by a random counter (not shown) mounted on the display control board 12, for example, and updates numerical data regularly (or irregularly) according to a predetermined procedure. For example, numerical data serving as various random numbers used for controlling the progress of the variable display is counted. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the display control board 12 side. As shown in FIG. 25, in this embodiment, on the display control board 12 side, a random number SR1 for determining a big hit symbol / left determined symbol, a random value SR2 for determining a middle determined symbol, a random value SR2 for determining a right determined symbol, The numerical data indicating the random value SR3 is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random values SR1 to SR3 are used for determining a combination of fixed decorative symbols that are derived and displayed as display results in the decorative symbol variation display in the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B.

  The random value SR1 for determining the big hit symbol / left fixed symbol is the same decorative symbol derived and displayed as the fixed decorative symbol on the variable display portions DL, DC, DR of “left”, “middle”, “right” at the time of the big hit And a random value used to determine a decorative symbol derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol on the “left” variable display portion DL at the time of losing, for example, in the range of “0” to “249” Takes a value. The random value SR2 for determining the medium fixed symbol is a random value used for determining a decorative symbol derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol on the variable display unit DC of “medium” at the time of losing, for example, “0” to It takes a value in the range of “162”. The random number value SR3 for determining the right fixed symbol is a random value used for determining a decorative symbol derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol on the “right” variable display unit DR at the time of normal loss, for example, “0”. A value in the range of “72” is taken.

  The ROM 131 is a semiconductor memory that stores various control programs executed by the display control CPU 130 and fixed parameters. In addition, the ROM 131 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the decorative symbol variation display by the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. For example, the ROM 131 stores the variation pattern designated by the first and second variation display start commands from the main board 11 and the type of the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game notified by the first and second special symbol notification commands. Based on this, the display control CPU 130 stores a plurality of types of determination tables and determination tables prepared for performing various determinations and determinations related to the decorative symbol variation display and the various effects display. The determination table includes a normal jackpot fixed decorative symbol determination table 140, a probabilistic big hit fixed decorative symbol determination table 141, a left fixed decorative symbol determination table 142, a middle fixed decorative symbol determination table 143, a right fixed decorative symbol determination table 144, and the like. include.

  FIG. 26A shows an example of the configuration of the normal big hit time decorative symbol determination table 140. The normal big-hit confirmed decorative symbol determination table 140 is a decoration that is executed corresponding to a special big game when a special big-hit in a special big game by one of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A, 4B. It is a table for determining the same normal symbol that is derived and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, and DR as the symbol variation display result. For example, the normal jackpot finalized symbol determination table 140 is used for determining the correspondence between the random number SR1 for determining the jackpot symbol / left final symbol and the fixed symbol number which is the symbol number of the normal symbol selected and determined as the final symbol. It consists of data.

  FIG. 26 (B) shows an example of the structure of the decorative symbol determination table 141 determined at the probability variation big hit. The certainty-decision big-decision decorative symbol determination table 141 is a decoration that is executed corresponding to a special-figure game when the special-fact big hit is made in the special-figure game by either one of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A, 4B. It is a table for determining the same probability variation symbol derived and displayed by the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as the symbol variation display result. For example, the probability variation big-decision decorative symbol determination table 141 is for determining the correspondence between the random number SR1 for determining the big-hit symbol / left final symbol and the fixed symbol number which is the symbol number of the probability variation symbol selected and determined as the final ornament symbol. It consists of data.

  FIG. 27A shows a configuration example of the left determined decorative symbol determination table 142. In the left determined decorative symbol determination table 142, a special symbol game is executed by one of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, and the decorative symbol variable display result executed corresponding to the special symbol game is displayed. This is a table for determining a decorative symbol that is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol in the “left” variable display portion DL when reaching a reach loss or a normal loss. For example, the left determined decorative symbol determination table 142 is a data for determination that associates the random number SR1 for determining the big hit symbol and the left fixed symbol with the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the fixed decorative symbol in the “left” variable display portion DL. Etc.

  FIG. 27B shows a configuration example of the medium-decorated decorative symbol determination table 143. In the medium-decided decorative symbol determination table 143, the special symbol game is executed by one of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, and the decorative symbol variable display result executed corresponding to the special symbol game is displayed. It is a table for determining a decorative symbol that is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol on the “medium” variable display unit DC when reaching reach loss or normal loss. For example, the medium-decorated decorative symbol determination table 143 is composed of determination data that associates the random number SR2 for determining the medium-decided symbol with the added value for the symbol number of the fixed decorative symbol in the “left” variable display portion DL. ing. That is, at the time of reach loss or normal loss, the addition value determined using the medium fixed ornament design determination table 143 based on the random value SR2 for determining the medium fixed symbol is used as the fixed decoration determined using the left fixed decorative symbol determination table 142. By adding to the symbol number of the symbol, it is possible to determine the fixed decorative symbol in the “middle” variable display portion DC. In addition, when the addition value determined using the middle fixed decoration design determination table 143 at the time of reach loss is “0”, the fixed decoration in the “middle” variable display unit DC is used to make the variable display result lost. One may be added to the symbol number of the symbol.

  FIG. 27C shows a configuration example of the right determined decorative symbol determination table 144. In the right determined decorative symbol determination table 144, a special symbol game is executed by one of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, and the decorative symbol variation display result executed corresponding to the special symbol game is displayed. It is a table for determining a decorative symbol that is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol on the “right” variable display portion DR when a normal loss occurs. For example, the right determined decorative symbol determination table 144 is made up of determination data that associates the random number SR3 for determining the right fixed symbol with the added value for the symbol number of the fixed decorative symbol in the “left” variable display portion DL. ing.

  The RAM 132 is a semiconductor memory used as a work area by the display control CPU 130. Display control for setting a plurality of types of flags to be set or cleared in the RAM 132 in accordance with the display state in each of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, the display control command from the main board 11, and the like. Display control timer setting for storing data indicating a plurality of types of timer values for measuring various times used for controlling the display operation in each of the flag setting unit and the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. A part or the like may be provided. The circuit used for flag setting and timer may be constituted by a register circuit provided separately from the RAM 132.

  In the display control flag setting unit, for example, display control process flags (first and second display control process flags) are provided corresponding to the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, respectively. The first and second display control process flags should be selected and executed in the first and second display control process processes executed corresponding to the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, respectively. Instruct.

  In the display control timer setting unit, for example, display control timers (first and second display control timers) are provided corresponding to the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, respectively. The first display control timer is for measuring the decorative display variation display time in the first image display device 5A on the display control board 12 side. The second display control timer is used to measure the decorative display variation display time in the second image display device 5B on the display control board 12 side. For example, each of the first and second display control timers is used as an up counter that stores a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time after the decorative symbol variation display is started and periodically counts up the timer value.

  The VDP 133 has a display control function and a high-speed drawing function for displaying an image in each of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, and executes image processing according to a drawing command from the display control CPU 130. To do. For example, the VDP 133 can execute processing such as transformation (enlargement / reduction, trimming) and composition of still images and moving images. The VDP 133 also has a function of expanding compressed moving image data. The VDP 133 has a two-dimensional address space independent of the display control CPU 130, and the VRAM 135 is mapped there. For example, image data is generated according to the data read from the CGROM 134 by the VDP 133 and developed on the VRAM 135. For example, R (red), G (green), B (blue) gradation data, a clock signal used to generate a scanning signal, and the like correspond to each of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. And output to the LCD drive circuits 136A and 136B provided. As an example, the gradation data of R, G, and B are each represented by 8 bits, and the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B each represent 256 gradations of R, G, and B according to instructions from the VDP 133, respectively. These can be combined to display about 16.7 million colors. It should be noted that the number of bits of the R, G, B gradation data may be other than 8 bits, or the number of bits in each of the R, G, B gradation data may be different.

  The CGROM 134 is used to store various image data for displaying images in the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. The CGROM 134 can specify and read out the image data by designating the address of the area where the image data is stored.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 28, the CGROM 134 stores the type of the number # 1 for forming the decorative design # 1 and the image data corresponding to the image change for each design included in the decorative design # 1. . In addition, the CGROM 134 stores, for example, the image data corresponding to the type of the number # 2 and the image change for forming the decorative design # 2 as shown in FIG. 29A, and the decorative design as shown in FIG. Image data corresponding to the type of the character # 1 and the image change for forming the symbol # 2 is stored for each symbol included in the decorative symbol # 2. In addition, in the CGROM 134, for example, as shown in FIG. 30A, image data corresponding to the type of numbered ring and image change for forming the first part in the decorative design # 3, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 30B, the type of character # 2 for forming the second part in the decorative design # 3 and the image data corresponding to the image change, as shown in FIG. 30C, the decorative design # 3 The type of character # 3 for forming the second part and the image data corresponding to the image change are stored for each symbol included in the decorative symbol # 3. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 30D, the CGROM 134 includes the ring effect image type combined with the decoration symbol # 3 and used for effect display, and image data corresponding to the image change. Is stored in units of images to be displayed. As described above, the CGROM 134 includes a plurality of image data for forming any one of the decorative symbols # 1 to # 3 and displaying each symbol in a plurality of display modes, and a plurality of effect images used for a predetermined effect display. Image data to be displayed in the display mode is stored.

  An image generated from the image data stored in the CGROM 134 can be displayed as an animation by switching and displaying like a flip book. For example, an animation of an arbitrary image / pattern can be displayed by switching and displaying an image of a pattern indicating one number included in the number # 1 in a predetermined order. More specifically, in the design showing one number included in the number # 1, flames are burning, clouds are flowing, water is flowing, or humans and animals Animated display is possible. In addition, by switching and displaying an image indicating one number included in the number # 2 or by switching and displaying an image indicating one character included in the character # 1, the number or character is rotated. It is possible to display animations such as crawls and crawls. In addition, by switching and displaying an image showing one character included in the character # 2, it is possible to display an animation such that the character crawls, and by switching an image showing one character included in the character # 3 By displaying, it is possible to display an animation so that the character can be terrified. Further, by switching and displaying the ring effect image, animation display such as “explosion”, “smoke”, “flame”, “extinguishing” can be performed. At this time, for example, by changing the combination and order of images to be displayed, the pattern change mode in the animation display can be switched.

  In order to control the display operation based on the image data stored in the CGROM 134, the ROM 131 mounted on the display control board 12 stores the types and arrangement of image data for forming the decorative symbols # 1 to # 3. In addition, index data that can specify the image data stored in the CGROM 134 by the animation display procedure (image change and change order) is stored. As a specific example of the index data stored in the ROM 131, in this embodiment, each of the index data table T11 shown in FIG. 31, the index data table T12 shown in FIG. 32, and the index data table T13 shown in FIG. Data to be prepared is prepared in advance.

  Image data of number # 1 included in decorative design # 1, image data of number # 2 and character # 1 included in decorative design # 2, ring with numbers included in decorative design # 3 (index data shown in FIG. 33) In the table T13, “ring”) and the image data of the character # 2 and the character # 3 are respectively a decorative symbol number and an animation display number assigned in accordance with a predetermined animation display procedure, for example “3-1”. It can be specified in the form. In this example, “3” indicates the symbol number of the decorative symbol, and “1” indicates the index number of the animation variation. For example, referring to the index data table T11 shown in FIG. 31, it can be specified that the image data of the number # 1 “3-1” is stored at addresses 03000H to 031FFH in the CGROM 134. The index data tables T11 to T13 may directly store addresses at which corresponding image data is stored in the CGROM 134, or may store index information for specifying the addresses.

  As can be specified from the index data table T11 shown in FIG. 31, the image data of the number # 1 is stored in the area of addresses 00000H to 098FFH in the CGROM 134. Further, the image data of the number # 2 is stored in the area of addresses 10000H to 199FFH in the CGROM 134 so that it can be identified from the index data table T12 shown in FIG. The image data of the character # 1 is stored in the area of addresses 20000H to 299FFH in the CGROM 134 so that it can be identified from the index data table T12 shown in FIG. The numbered ring image data is stored in the area of addresses 30000H to 349FFH in the CGROM 134 so that it can be identified from the index data table T13 shown in FIG. The image data of the character # 2 is stored in the area of addresses 40000H to 449FFH in the CGROM 134 so that it can be identified from the index data table T13 shown in FIG. The image data of the character # 3 is stored in the area of addresses 50000H to 549FFH in the CGROM 134 so that it can be identified from the index data table T13 shown in FIG. The ring effect image data is stored in the area of addresses 60000H to 604FFH in the CGROM 134 so as to be specified from the index data table T13 shown in FIG.

  The ROM 131 includes a display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A, a changing speed definition table T30 shown in FIG. 34B, and a changing direction definition table T40 shown in FIG. Data is also stored in advance. The display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A defines the position on the screen where each symbol is displayed, the size of the display area, etc., corresponding to the decorative display variation display mode and stop display mode. Display area size, display position on screen, number of decorative symbols to be extracted, reference position of display area on VRAM 135, enlargement ratio of decorative symbols, rotational position, etc. , “Right” variable display portions DL, DC, DR, and setting data to be associated with each other. Here, “↓” in the fluctuation direction shown in the display area size data table T20 is vertical scroll display in the downward direction, “↑” is vertical scroll display in the upward direction, and “→” is horizontal scroll in the right direction. “←” is a horizontal scroll display in the left direction.

  For example, “standard (↑)” in the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A is displayed in the vertical direction in the display areas corresponding to the variable display portions DL, DC, DR in the vertical scroll display in the upward direction. A case where three decorative symbols are arranged is shown. In this case, the size of the display area in the x direction (horizontal direction) is 150 (dots, pixels), the size in the y direction (vertical direction) is 460 (dots, pixels), and the display position (xy coordinates) is ( 10, 10), the number of symbols to be extracted is “4”, the reference position (xy coordinates) of the display area is (0, 0), the magnification of each symbol is “1”, and the rotation angle is “0”. "Is set respectively.

  The “switching” in the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A is performed by changing the transparency of the displayed decorative design without performing the scroll display of the decorative design. A case is shown in which one decorative symbol is arranged and displayed in the display area corresponding to DR. In this case, the size in the display area in both the x and y directions is 150 (dots, pixels), the display position (xy coordinates) is (210, 210), and the number of symbols to be extracted is “2”. The reference position (xy coordinates) of the area is set to (0, 150), the enlargement ratio of each symbol is set to “1.5”, and the rotation angle is set to “0”. Similarly, for example, “1 pattern (↓)” in the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A is a display area corresponding to each of the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR in the vertical scroll display in the downward direction. Shows a case where one decorative design is arranged. In this case, the size in the x direction in the display area is extracted to 150 (dots, pixels), the size in the y direction is extracted to 460 (dots, pixels), and the display position (xy coordinates) is extracted to (10, 10). The number of symbols is set to “2”, the reference position (xy coordinates) of the display area is set to (0, 150), the magnification of each symbol is set to “1”, and the rotation angle is set to “0”. become.

  In “3 symbol stop” in the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A, three decorative symbols are arranged in the vertical direction in the display region corresponding to each variable display part DL, DC, DR, and the fluctuation is stopped. It shows the case. In this case, the size in the display area in the x direction is 150 (dots, pixels), the size in the y direction is 460 (dots, pixels), and the display position (xy coordinates) is (10, 10). The number is set to “3”, the reference position (xy coordinates) of the display area is set to (0, 150), the enlargement ratio of each symbol is set to “1”, and the rotation angle is set to “0”. .

  The “one symbol stop” in the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34 (A) is arranged such that one decorative symbol is arranged in the corresponding display region of each variable display portion DL, DC, DR, and the fluctuation is stopped. Show the case. In this case, the size of the display area in both the x and y directions is 150 (dots, pixels), the display position (xy coordinates) is (210, 210), the number of symbols to be extracted is “1”, and the display area The reference position (xy coordinates) is set to (0, 0), the enlargement ratio of each symbol is set to “1.5”, and the rotation angle is set to “0”.

  The variation speed definition table T30 shown in FIG. 34B is for defining the variation speed when the decorative symbol variation display is performed, and is composed of data specifying the scroll time per dot. Has been. The variation direction definition table T40 shown in FIG. 34C is for defining the variation direction when the decorative symbol variation display is performed, and is composed of data specifying the variation direction of the decorative symbol. ing.

  As information for specifying the variation display mode and stop display mode of the decorative symbol from the start to stop of the decorative symbol, in this embodiment, a variation speed / direction data table configured corresponding to each variation pattern is provided. For example, it is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 131. As a specific example, FIG. 35A shows a configuration example of the fluctuation speed / direction data table T31 prepared corresponding to the fluctuation pattern A1, and FIG. 35B is prepared corresponding to the fluctuation pattern B1. 36 (A) to 36 (C) show configuration examples of the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 to T333 prepared for the fluctuation patterns C1 to C3. ing. In addition to these, a fluctuation speed / direction data table corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns D, O, P, α1 to α3, β1 to β3, γ1, γ2, and δ1 to δ3 is prepared. Note that the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T31 and T32 shown in FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (B) are prepared to specify the fluctuation display mode and the stop display mode of the decorative symbols in the “medium” variable display unit DC. It is a table. As for the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR, it is only necessary to prepare a fluctuation speed / direction data table that can specify the decorative display fluctuation display mode and the stop display mode in each fluctuation pattern. Each variation speed / direction data table T31, T32, T331 to T333 is, for example, setting data that can specify the variation speed, the variation direction, the presence / absence of animation variation, etc., corresponding to the time from the variation start to stop of the decorative symbol It is composed of

  Note that the fluctuation speeds in the latter half of the fluctuation speed / direction data table T32 prepared in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern B1 shown in FIG. 35 (B) (entries on the 8th to 11th lines after the start of animation fluctuation). The counter, the variation time, and the like are set according to the return position and the final stop position in the return variation corresponding to the symbols included in the decorative symbol # 2 that are determined as the final decorative symbol. This setting may be performed by executing a predetermined calculation each time a confirmed decorative symbol is determined, or setting data indicating a setting corresponding to each symbol included in decorative symbol # 2 May be performed by, for example, storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 131 and preparing it in advance, and reading out the one corresponding to the confirmed decorative design.

  The VRAM 135 is a frame buffer memory for developing image data generated by the VDP 133. LCD driving circuits 136A and 136B are provided corresponding to the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, respectively, and generate scanning signals from gradation data, clock signals, and the like input from the VDP 133, and By outputting to the corresponding one of the second image display devices 5A and 5B, an image is displayed.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when the power supply voltage is supplied, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined game control main process. In this game control main process, the operation of each part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized and predetermined initial settings are performed. By executing such a game control main process, the CPU 103 is set to generate a timer interrupt periodically (for example, every 2 milliseconds).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control interrupt process executed every time a timer interrupt occurs. In this example, when a timer interrupt occurs in the CPU 103, first, a predetermined switch process is executed to determine the state of the detection signal input from each winning port switch 70 via the switch circuit 107 (step S11). ). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). Thereafter, a determination random number update process (step S13) for updating the determination random number counted by the random number circuit 104 and a display random number update process (step S14) for updating the display random number are sequentially executed. The Note that if only the random number as the hardware random number generated by the random number circuit 104 is used, and the random number circuit 104 can update the numerical data that becomes the random number value without an instruction from the CPU 103, step S13 is performed. And the process of step S14 may not be executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a start winning process (step S15). In the start winning process, when a winning of a game ball to the normal variable winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for jackpot determination is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Then, a process of storing the special prize reservation storage unit 121 together with the start winning opening data is executed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S16). In the first special symbol process, the value of the first special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 123 is updated according to the gaming state, and the display operation control or the first special symbol display device 4A is controlled. Various processes are selected and executed in order to set the opening / closing operation of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7A in a predetermined procedure. Subsequent to the first special symbol process, the second special symbol process is executed (step S17). In the second special symbol process, the value of the second special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 123 is updated according to the gaming state, and the second special symbol display device 4B controls the display operation and the second Various processes are selected and executed in order to set the opening / closing operation of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7B in a predetermined procedure.

  Subsequent to the second special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S18), whereby the display operation (for example, lighting of the LED) in the normal symbol display 20 provided corresponding to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is performed. ), Etc., to control normal symbol variation display (for example, lighting / flashing display) and setting of tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Further, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the display control board 12 by executing a predetermined command control process, and instructs an operation control according to the gaming state. (Step S19). Further, by executing a predetermined information output process, the contents of the storage area for various output data are output to each output port included in the I / O port 105 (step S20). In this information output process, a command for outputting jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information, etc. to the hall management computer is also transmitted from the main board 11 to a predetermined information terminal board.

  Subsequently, by executing a predetermined solenoid output process, the CPU 103 performs tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the first and second special variable winning ball devices 7A when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , 7B, the opening / closing control of the opening / closing plate is performed (step S21). After that, by executing predetermined prize ball processing, the number of prize balls is set based on the detection signal input from each prize opening switch 70, and the payout control command can be output to the payout control board. (Step S22).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 37 as the start winning process. In this starting winning process, the CPU 103 first detects whether or not a game ball has won the normal variable winning ball device 6A, for example, by detecting the game ball in the normal variable winning ball device 6A included in each winning port switch 70. The determination is made by checking the detection signal from the first start winning opening switch 41a to be performed (step S201). When the game ball wins the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6A and the detection signal from the first start winning port switch 41a is turned on (step S201; Yes), the game ball is provided in the game control data holding area 120. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved memories in the special figure reservation storage unit 121 has reached an upper limit value (for example, “8”) (step S202). At this time, if the special figure hold storage unit 121 stores the jackpot determination random number value MR1 in association with the maximum value of the hold number, it is determined that the hold storage number has reached the upper limit value.

  When the number of reserved memories in the special figure reservation storage unit 121 is less than the upper limit value (step S202; No), for example, the number of reserved memories based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning ball device 6A serving as the first start winning opening is obtained. In order to count, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number by adding 1 to the count value in the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 125 (step S203). Also, numerical data indicating the jackpot determination random number MR1 updated by the random number circuit 104 or the like is extracted (step S204). The CPU 103 displays the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 extracted at this time together with the start winning opening data “first” indicating that the game ball has won the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6A which is the first starting winning opening. It is stored by setting it at the head of the empty entry in the hold storage unit 121 (step S205). At this time, one of the LEDs that are turned off in the start winning memory display 10 (for example, the leftmost LED among the LEDs that are turned off) is turned on. May be performed.

  When the detection signal from the first start winning a prize mouth switch 41a is in an OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), or the number of reserved memories in the special figure reservation storage unit 121 has reached the upper limit value in step S202. When (Step S202; Yes) or after executing the processing of Step S205, whether or not a game ball has won the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, for example, is included in each winning port switch 70, and a normal variable winning The determination is made by checking the detection signal from the second start winning port switch 41b for detecting the game ball in the ball device 6B (step S206). If the detection signal from the second start winning port switch 41b is OFF because the game ball has not won the normal variable winning ball device 6B (step S206; No), the start winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the detection signal from the second start winning port switch 41b is turned on (step S206; Yes), the special figure holding storage unit 121 holds the ball. It is determined whether the number of memories has reached the upper limit (step S207). When the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit (step S207; Yes), the start winning process is terminated as it is. When the number of reserved memories in the special figure reservation storage unit 121 is less than the upper limit value in step S207 (step S207; No), for example, based on the winning of a game ball to the normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as the second start winning opening In order to count the reserved memory number, the count value in the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 125 is incremented by 1, for example, and the second reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (step S208). Also, numerical data indicating the jackpot determination random value MR1 updated by the random number circuit 104 or the like is extracted (step S209). The CPU 103 displays the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 extracted at this time together with the start winning opening data “second” indicating that the game ball has won the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B which is the second starting winning opening. It is stored by setting it at the head of the empty entry in the holding storage unit 121 (step S210). At this time, one of the LEDs that are turned off in the start winning memory display 10 (for example, the leftmost LED among the LEDs that are turned off) is turned on. May be performed.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S16 shown in FIG. 37 as the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol process shown in FIG. 39, the following steps are performed according to the value of the first special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 123 corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A. Each process of S110-S116 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0”. This special symbol normal process is performed by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for jackpot determination stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 121 together with the start winning opening data “first”. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start the game. The variation start process in step S111 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “1”. This variation start process includes a process of setting a confirmed special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a variation display result of a special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, and a special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. This includes a process for determining the variation display time of the special symbol. Corresponding to the confirmed special symbol set in step S111 or the special symbol variable display time, control data is set in a predetermined command transmission table, for example, from the main board 11 to the display control board 12. The first variation display start command and the first special symbol notification command are set to be transmittable. Thereafter, by executing the command control processing in step S19 shown in FIG. 37, the first variation display start command and the first special symbol notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the display control board 12.

  The variable display control process of step S112 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. This variation display control process is performed by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the timer value in the first variation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 124 corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A. It includes processing for measuring the remaining variable display time of special symbols in the game. The variable stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. The process at the time of the fluctuation stop includes a process for performing a setting for transmitting to the display control board 12 a first fluctuation display end command indicating that the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is finished. It is out.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big prize opening includes an initialization process in the big hit operation such as opening and closing the opening / closing plate in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 7A. The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “5”. The process during opening of the big prize opening includes various processes related to the big hit operation such as opening / closing the opening / closing plate in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 7A, and the opening time per time in the first special variable winning ball apparatus 7A. Includes processing to check. Further, in the special winning opening opening process, it is determined whether or not the big hit operation by the first special variable winning ball device 7A is finished, and if finished, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to “6”. The jackpot end process in step S116 is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “6”. The jackpot end process includes a process of transmitting a jackpot end command for instructing the display control board 12 to end the jackpot gaming state.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. 40, when the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 40 is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether the value of the second special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 123 is “4” or more, for example. It is determined, for example, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state (step S221). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state (step S221; Yes), the start condition (first start condition) for starting the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is not satisfied. Judgment is made, and the special symbol normal processing is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not controlled to the big hit gaming state (step S221; No), for example, a first reserved memory number counted by a first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 125, for example. Is determined to be “0” (step S222). At this time, the start winning data stored in the special figure storage unit 121 is read, and it is determined whether or not the start winning data “first” is included, so that the first reserved memory number is “0”. It may be determined whether or not. When it is determined that the first reserved storage number is “0” (step S222; Yes), the special symbol normal process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the first reserved storage number is other than “0” (step S222; No), “1” is set as an initial value to the variable k for checking the storage contents of the special figure storage unit 121. (Step S223). Subsequently, the starting prize opening data stored in association with the holding number “k” in the special figure holding storage unit 121 is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the starting prize opening data “first”. (Step S224). When the start winning opening data read in step S224 is not the starting winning opening data “first” indicating the winning of the game ball to the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6A which is the first starting winning opening (step S224; No). It is determined whether or not the value of the variable k is equal to the number of reserved storages in the special figure storage unit 121 (step S225). When the value of the variable k is equal to the reserved storage number in the special figure reservation storage unit 121 (step S225; Yes), the numerical data indicating the value of the random number for jackpot determination stored in the special figure storage unit 121 includes Based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6A, it is determined that there is nothing extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like, and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Alternatively, it may be determined that the first reserved memory number and the start winning data stored in the special figure storage unit 121 do not match, and a predetermined error process may be executed.

  When it is determined in step S225 that the value of the variable k is different from the number of reserved storages in the special figure storage unit 121 (step S225; No), the variable k is incremented by 1 (step S226). The process returns to step S224. Then, when it is determined that the start prize opening data read in step S224 is the start prize opening data indicating “first” (step S224; Yes), the reservation number “k” is stored from the special figure reservation storage unit 121. "Is read (step S227). At this time, for example, the count value in the first reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, for example, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1, and the stored data stored in the entry lower than the hold number “k” is 1 The entry is shifted up by one (step S228). When the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 in step S228, for example, one of the LEDs that are lit on the start winning memory indicator 10 (for example, the rightmost LED among the lit LEDs) is selected. You may make it perform light extinction control of the start winning memory | storage display 10, such as making it light-extinguish.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 stops and displays the jackpot symbol as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in which the start condition is satisfied based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for jackpot determination included in the storage data read in step S227. Thus, a big hit / probable change determination process is executed to determine whether or not the fluctuation display result is a big hit, and to determine whether to make a promising big hit or a normal big hit if the big win is set (step S229). Thereafter, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the process at the time of starting the change (step S230).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit / probability change determination process executed in step S229 of FIG. When the big hit / probability change determination process shown in FIG. 41 is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 123 is on (step S321). Here, the probability variation flag is in an ON state when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state by the probability variation control. When the probability change flag is on (step S321; Yes), a probability change time as shown in FIG. 12B is used as a table for determining whether or not the variation display result in the special figure game is a big hit. The big hit determination table 111 is set (step S322). On the other hand, if the probability changing flag is off and not in the high probability state (step S321; No), it is determined that the normal gaming state is set, and the normal big hit determination table 110 as shown in FIG. Setting is made (step S323).

  The CPU 103 uses the jackpot determination tables 110 and 111 set in step S322 or S323 based on the jackpot determination random number MR1 read in step S227 shown in FIG. Is determined to be a big hit or a loss (step S324). Then, it is specified whether or not the decision result is determined to be a big hit (step S325), and if it is decided to lose (step S325; No), the big hit determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined to be a big hit (step S325; Yes), after setting the first big hit flag to an ON state (step S326), it is determined whether to make a probability big hit or a normal big hit. The process for determining is executed. For example, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for probability variation determination from the random number circuit 104 or the like (step S327), and determines whether or not the extracted random number value MR4 is an odd number (step S328). In this embodiment, when the random number MR4 extracted in step S327 is an odd number (step S328; Yes), it is determined that the probability variation is a big hit, and the game corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. A first certain change determination flag provided in the control flag setting unit 123 is set to an on state (step S329).

  If it is determined in step S328 that the random number MR4 is an even number (step S328; No), it is determined that it is a normal big hit, and the first probability change confirmation flag is cleared and turned off ( Step S330). Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a probability variation big hit when the random number MR4 extracted in step S327 is an odd number, for example, whether the random value MR4 is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit. By referring to a probability variation determination table composed of determination data associated with the determination result, it may be determined whether the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit.

  42 and 43 are flowcharts showing an example of the variation start time process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the fluctuation start process shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first big hit flag is on (step S241). When the first big hit flag is on (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first certainty change confirmation flag is on (step S242).

  When the first certainty change confirmation flag is OFF in step S242 (step S242; No), a special symbol indicating “3”, which is a normal jackpot symbol, among the multiple types of special symbols is displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A. The determined special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result in the special figure game of this time is determined (step S243). On the other hand, when the first certainty change confirmation flag is on in step S242 (step S242; Yes), a special symbol indicating “7”, which is a probable big hit symbol among a plurality of types of special symbols, is displayed in the first special symbol display. The determined special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variation display result in the special figure game this time by the device 4A is determined (step S244).

  Subsequently, the second reserved memory number in the special figure hold memory unit 121 is specified, and it is determined whether or not the specified reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined continuous performance execution allowable value (step S245). Here, the continuous effect execution allowable value is obtained by executing the special symbol game a plurality of times by the second special symbol display device 4B in a period in which one special symbol game is being executed by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, the second image display device 5B or the like is a reference value for performing a continuous effect over a plurality of special figure games. In this embodiment, as a specific example, the continuous effect execution allowable value is predetermined as “4”. Further, the CPU 103 may specify the second reserved memory number by reading a count value in a counter provided for the special figure reserved memory unit 121 to count the second reserved memory number, for example. Alternatively, the second reserved memory number may be specified by reading the start winning data stored in the special figure holding storage unit 121 and counting the number of start winning data “second” stored.

  When it is determined in step S245 that the continuous effect execution allowable value is exceeded (step S245; Yes), it is determined that the continuous effect as the first effect is executed, and the value of the effect mode flag is set to “1”. While being updated, “1” is set as the count initial value in the performance counter (step S246). Subsequent to step S246, the variation pattern D (big hit) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in this special figure game (step S247). That is, when it is determined that the continuous effect as the first effect is to be executed, it is determined that the variation pattern has a variation time sufficiently longer than the variation time of the special symbol in the other variation patterns.

  When the first big hit flag is off in step S241 (step S241; No), the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the special symbol determined at the time of losing is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like (step S248). Subsequently, by referring to the lost special symbol determination table 112 based on the extracted random value MR5, the fixed special symbol in the special game by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined (step S249).

  Subsequently, as in step S245, the second reserved memory number in the special figure hold memory unit 121 is specified, and it is determined whether or not the specified hold memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined continuous performance execution allowable value. (Step S250). When it is determined in step S250 that it is equal to or greater than the continuous effect execution allowable value (step S250; Yes), for example, the continuous effect execution determination updated by the random number circuit 104 or the determination random number update process in step S13 shown in FIG. Numerical data representing the random number MR6 for use is extracted (step S251). Subsequently, based on the extracted random number value, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect as the first effect by referring to, for example, the lost effect continuous effect determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 or the like. (Step S252). Here, the continuous effect determination table at the time of the loss may be configured by setting data that associates the value of the random number for continuous effect execution determination with the determination result of whether or not to execute the continuous effect.

  When it is determined in step S252 that the continuous effect is to be executed (step S252; Yes), the value of the effect mode flag is updated to “1” as in step S246, and an initial value “ 1 "is set (step S253). Subsequent to step S253, the variation pattern D (reach loss) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in the special figure game this time (step S254).

  In steps S245 and S250, for example, the second reserved memory number in the special figure hold memory unit 121 is “0”, and the second reserved memory number is less than the continuous performance execution allowable value. When it is determined that the effect is not executed, or when it is determined that the continuous effect is not executed in step S252 (step S252; No), it is determined whether or not the first big hit flag is on. (Step S255 in FIG. 43). At this time, if the first big hit flag is on (step S255; Yes), the big hit pattern determination table 116 shown in FIG. 22C is set as a table for selecting the variation pattern ( Step S256).

  If the first big hit flag is off in step S255 (step S255; No), it is determined whether the probability changing flag is on (step S257). If the flag is off (step S257; No). ), It is determined whether or not the display mode in the variation display of the decorative symbols executed corresponding to the special figure game is to be reached (step S258). At this time, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for reach determination is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like, and a predetermined reach determination table is referred to based on the extracted random number value MR2 to determine whether or not to reach. do it. The reach determination table only needs to be composed of determination data associated with the determination result of whether or not the reach determination random value MR2 is to be reached.

  When it is determined in step S258 that reach is to be made (step S258; Yes), the reach / loss pattern determination table 115 shown in FIG. 22B is set as a table for selecting a variation pattern (step S259). ). On the other hand, when it is determined not to reach (step S258; No), the normal loss pattern determination table 114 shown in FIG. 22A is set as a table for selecting the variation pattern. (Step S260).

  After setting the pattern determination table in any of the processes of steps S256, S259, and S260, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like (step S261), and the extracted disturbance The variation pattern is selected and determined by referring to the pattern determination table set based on the numerical value MR3 (step S262). Further, when it is determined in step S257 that the probability variation flag is on (step S257; Yes), a variation pattern P shown in FIG. 14 is illustrated as a variation pattern in which the variation display time is shorter than that in the normal gaming state. (Normal loss) is selected and determined (step S263).

  After the change pattern is selected and determined in any of the processes of steps S247, S254, S262, and S263, a display such as setting control data corresponding to the determined change pattern in a predetermined command transmission table, etc. Setting for transmitting the first variation display start command to the control board 12 is performed (step S264). In addition, for example, the control data corresponding to the confirmed special symbol determined in any of the processes of steps S243, S244, and S249 is set to the first command control table 12 such as setting the control data in a predetermined command transmission table. Settings for transmitting a special symbol notification command are also made (step S265).

  Thereafter, a timer initial value corresponding to the variation display time of the special symbol in the variation pattern used in this special diagram game is set in the first variation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 124 (step S266). ). Then, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A is set to start the variable symbol variation display such as starting the lighting / extinguishing operation of each segment and each dot in the first special symbol display device 4A (step S267). . At this time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to “2” corresponding to the variable display control process (step S268).

  In the second special symbol process of step S17 shown in FIG. 37, a process in which the first special symbol process shown in FIG. 39 is roughly adapted to the second special symbol display device 4B may be executed. For example, the special symbol normal process that is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “0” is the jackpot determination random number stored in the special symbol holding storage unit 121 together with the start winning opening data “second”. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the numerical data indicating the value of the numerical value MR1. Also, in the special symbol normal process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “0”, whether the variation display result in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is a big hit or a loss. A big hit / probability change determination process is executed to determine whether or not the big hit is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit.

  The variation start time process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “1” is a fixed special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. And a process for determining a variation display time of a special symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display control process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “2” is a second variable time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 124 corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B. Based on the timer value in the above, includes processing for measuring the remaining variable display time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B.

  The variable stop process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “3” displays a second variable display end command indicating that the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. This includes processing for performing settings for transmission to the control board 12. The pre-opening pre-opening process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “4” includes an initialization process in the big hit operation such as opening / closing the open / close plate in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 7B. Contains. The special prize opening opening process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “5” includes various processes related to the big hit operation such as opening / closing the opening / closing plate by the second special variable winning ball apparatus 7B. And a process of checking the opening time per time in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 7B. Further, in the special winning opening opening process, it is determined whether or not the big hit operation by the second special variable winning ball device 7B is finished, and if it is finished, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to “6”. The jackpot end process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “6” includes a process of transmitting a jackpot end command for instructing the display control board 12 to end the jackpot gaming state. .

  44 and 45 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol normal process that is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “0”. When the special symbol normal process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the value of the first special symbol process flag is “4” or more, for example, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters the big hit gaming state. It is determined whether or not it is controlled (step S271). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state (step S271; Yes), the start condition (second start condition) for starting the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is not satisfied. Judgment is made, and the special symbol normal processing is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not controlled to the big hit gaming state (step S271; No), it is determined whether or not the second special figure holding storage number in the special figure holding storage unit 121 is “0”. (Step S272). For example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number is “0” by reading the count value in the counter provided for the special figure reserved memory unit 121 to count the second reserved memory number. May be. Alternatively, by reading the start winning data stored in the special figure storage unit 121 and determining whether or not the start winning data “second” is included, the second reserved memory number becomes “0”. It may be determined whether or not. When it is determined that the second reserved storage number is “0” (step S272; Yes), the special symbol normal process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is other than “0” (step S272; No), “1” is set as an initial value to the variable k for checking the stored contents of the special figure hold memory unit 121. (Step S273). Subsequently, the starting prize opening data stored in the special figure holding storage unit 121 in association with the holding number “k” is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the starting prize opening data “second”. (Step S274). When the start winning opening data read in step S274 is not the starting winning opening data “second” indicating the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B which is the second starting winning opening (step S274; No). It is determined whether or not the value of the variable k is equal to the number of reserved storages in the special figure storage unit 121 (step S275). When the value of the variable k is equal to the number of reserved storage in the special figure reservation storage unit 121 (step S275; Yes), the numerical data indicating the value of the random number for jackpot determination stored in the special figure storage unit 121 includes It is determined that there is nothing extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 5B, and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Alternatively, it may be determined that the second reserved storage number and the start winning data stored in the special figure storage unit 121 do not match, and a predetermined error process may be executed.

  When it is determined in step S275 that the value of variable k is different from the number of reserved memories in special figure reservation storage unit 121 (step S275; No), after adding 1 to variable k (step S276), The process returns to step S274. When it is determined that the start winning opening data read in step S274 is the starting winning opening data indicating “second” (step S274; Yes), the value of the effect mode flag becomes “0”. It is determined whether or not (step S277). When the value of the effect mode flag is “0”, neither the continuous effect as the first effect nor the second effect different from the effect effect is executed, so the continuous effect as the first effect is executed. Whether or not is determined. That is, the CPU 103 identifies the second reserved memory number in the special figure reservation storage unit 121 and determines whether or not the specified reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined continuous performance execution allowable value (step S278). ). Here, the CPU 103 may specify the second reserved memory number by reading a count value in a counter provided for the special figure reserved memory unit 121 to count the second reserved memory number, for example. Alternatively, the second reserved memory number may be specified by reading the start winning data stored in the special figure holding storage unit 121 and counting the number of start winning data “second” stored. When it is determined that the second reserved storage number is equal to or greater than the continuous effect execution allowable value (step S278; Yes), for example, it is updated by the random number circuit 104 or the determination random number update process in step S13 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating the value of the random effect for determining the continuous performance execution is extracted (step S279). Subsequently, based on the extracted random number value, for example, by referring to a continuous effect determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect (step S280).

  When it is determined in step S280 that the continuous effect is to be executed (step S280; Yes), the value of the effect mode flag is updated to “1”, and the count initial value “1” is set in the effect counter. (Step S281). As a result, independent of the execution status of the special symbol game on the first special symbol display device 4A, the first effect is a continuous effect during the variable display of the special symbol multiple times by the second special symbol display device 4B. It is possible to make settings for executing the continuous production.

  When the value of the effect mode flag is other than “0” in step S277 (step S277; No), and when the second reserved storage number is less than the continuous effect execution allowable value in step S278 (step S278; No). When it is determined in step S280 that the continuous effect is not to be executed (step S280; No) and after the process of step S281 is executed, the special figure hold storage unit 121 associates the hold number “k”. The stored data is read (step S282 in FIG. 45). At this time, 1 is subtracted from the second reserved storage number in the special figure storage unit 121, and the stored data stored in the entry lower than the hold number “k” is shifted up by one entry (step S283). ). When subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory number in step S283, for example, one of the LEDs that are lit on the start winning memory indicator 10 (for example, the rightmost LED among the LEDs that are lit). You may make it perform light extinction control of the start winning memory | storage display 10, such as making it light-extinguish.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the jackpot / probability change determination process shown in FIG. 41 based on the numerical data indicating the value of the jackpot determination random number included in the storage data read in step S282 (step S284). Thereafter, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, which is a value corresponding to the process at the time of starting the change (step S285).

  FIG. 46 and FIG. 47 are flowcharts showing an example of the variation start time process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “1”. In this variation start process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second big hit flag is on as shown in FIG. 46 (step S291). When the second big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second probability variation confirmation flag is on (step S292).

  When the second certainty change confirmation flag is off in step S292 (step S292; No), a special symbol indicating “3”, which is a normal jackpot symbol, among a plurality of types of special symbols is displayed as the second special symbol display device 4B. The determined special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result in the special figure game of this time is determined (step S293). On the other hand, when the second certainty change confirmation flag is turned on in step S292 (step S292; Yes), a special symbol indicating “7”, which is a probable big hit symbol among a plurality of types of special symbols, is displayed as the second special symbol. The determined special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variation display result in the special figure game of this time by the device 4B is determined (step S294).

  When the second big hit flag is OFF in step S291 (step S291; No), numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the special symbol determined when lost is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like (step S295). Subsequently, by referring to the lost special symbol determination table 112 based on the extracted random value MR5, the final special symbol in the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined (step S296).

  Subsequent to steps S293, S294, and S296, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “0” (step S297). When the value of the effect mode flag is “0” (step S297; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second big hit flag is on (step S298). At this time, if the second big hit flag is on (step S298; Yes), the big hit pattern determination table 116 shown in FIG. 22C is set as a table for selecting the fluctuation pattern ( Step S299).

  When the second big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether or not the probability changing flag is on (step S300), and when it is off (step S300; No). ), It is determined whether or not the display mode in the variation display of the decorative symbols executed corresponding to the special figure game is to be reached (step S301). At this time, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for reach determination is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like, and a predetermined reach determination table is referred to based on the extracted random number value MR2 to determine whether or not to reach. do it. The reach determination table only needs to be composed of determination data associated with the determination result of whether or not the reach determination random value MR2 is to be reached.

  When it is determined in step S301 that reach is to be reached (step S301; Yes), the reach / losing pattern determination table 115 shown in FIG. 22B is set as a table for selecting a variation pattern (step S302). ). On the other hand, when it is determined not to reach (step S301; No), the normal loss pattern determination table 114 shown in FIG. 22A is set as a table for selecting a variation pattern. (Step S303).

  After setting the pattern determination table in any of the processes of steps S299, S302, and S303, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like (step S304), The variation pattern is selected and determined by referring to the pattern determination table set based on the numerical value MR3 (step S305). Further, when it is determined in step S300 that the probability variation flag is on (step S300; Yes), a variation pattern P shown in FIG. 14 is illustrated as a variation pattern in which the variation display time is shorter than that in the normal gaming state. (Normal loss) is selected and determined (step S306).

  When it is determined in step S297 that the value of the effect mode flag is other than “0” (step S297; No), the continuous effect as the first effect is different from the continuous effect as the second effect. Is determined to be executed, and it is determined whether or not the count value in the effect counter is equal to a predetermined continuous effect count (“4” in this embodiment) (FIG. 47). Step S307). At this time, if it is determined that the count value of the production counter is different from the number of continuous productions (step S307; No), the special drawing of this time is executed by executing a continuous production pattern determination process described later. A variation pattern in the game is selected and determined (step S308). On the other hand, when it is determined that the count value of the production counter is equal to the number of continuous productions (step S307; Yes), the final production pattern determination process described later is executed, so that in the current special game. A variation pattern is selected and determined (step S309).

  After the change pattern is selected and determined in any of the processes of steps S306, S304, S308, and S309, display such as setting control data corresponding to the determined change pattern in a predetermined command transmission table, for example Settings are made to transmit a second variation display start command to the control board 12 (step S310). Further, for example, the control data corresponding to the confirmed special symbol determined in any of the processes of steps S293, S294, and S296 is set in a predetermined command transmission table, and the second control is performed on the display control board 12. Settings for transmitting a special symbol notification command are also made (step S311).

  Thereafter, a timer initial value corresponding to the variation display time of the special symbol in the variation pattern used in the special diagram game of this time is set in the second variation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 124 (step S312). ). Then, for example, the second special symbol display device 4B is set to start the variation display of the special symbols, such as starting the lighting / extinguishing operation of each segment and each dot in the second special symbol display device 4B (step S313). . At this time, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to “2” corresponding to the variable display control process (step S314).

  48 to 50 are flowcharts showing an example of the continuous effect pattern determination process executed in step Sstep S308 of FIG. When the continuous effect pattern determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the count value in the effect number counter is “1” as shown in FIG. 48 (step S401). When the count value of the effect counter is “1” (step S401; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second big hit flag is on (step S402). When it is determined in step S402 that the second big hit flag is on (step S402; Yes), the value of the effect mode flag is updated to “2” and the value of the effect pattern flag is set to “1”. Set (step S403). Thereafter, the variation pattern α1 (big hit) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in this special figure game (step S404).

  When the second big hit flag is off in step S402 (step S402; No), for example, the reach determination table stored in the ROM 101 in advance is referred to based on the reach determination random number MR2 obtained from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Thus, it is determined whether or not the variation display mode of the decorative symbols by the second image display device 5B is to be reached during the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B (step S405). When it is determined that the reach is reached (step S405; Yes), the value of the effect pattern flag is set to “2” (step S406). Thereafter, the variation pattern α1 (reach lose) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in this special figure game (step S407).

  When it is determined in step S405 that the reach is not made (step S405; No), the value of the effect pattern flag is set to “3” (step S408). After that, the variation pattern α1 (normal loss) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in this special figure game (step S409). After the variable display pattern is determined in any of steps S404, S407, and S409, the count value of the effect counter is incremented by 1 (step S410).

  When it is determined in step S401 that the count value of the effect number counter is other than “1” (step S401; No), it is determined whether or not the count value in the effect number counter is “2”. (Step S411 in FIG. 49). Then, when the count value of the production counter is “2” (step S411; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second big hit flag is on (step S412). When it is determined in step S412 that the second big hit flag is on (step S412; Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S413). When the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S413; Yes), the value of the effect mode flag is updated to “2” (step S414), and then the variation pattern used in this special figure game. Then, the variation pattern α2 (big hit) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined (step S415).

  When it is determined in step S413 that the value of the effect mode flag is not “1” (step S413; No), it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “2”, and this special figure game for this time. As the variation pattern used in the above, the variation pattern γ1 (big hit) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined (step S416).

  When the second big hit flag is off in step S412 (step S412; No), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S417). When the value of the effect mode flag is “1” in step S417 (step S417; Yes), the variation pattern α2 (normal loss) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in this special figure game. (Step S418).

  On the other hand, when the value of the effect mode flag is not “1” in step S417 (step S417; No), it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “2”, and is used in the present special game. As the variation pattern, the variation pattern γ1 (normal loss) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined (step S419). After the variable display pattern is determined in any of steps S415, S416, S418, and S419, the process proceeds to step S410 shown in FIG. 48, and the count value of the effect number counter is incremented by one.

  When it is determined in step S411 that the count value of the effect number counter is other than “2” (step S411; No), the count value of the effect number counter is “3”, and the CPU 103 Then, it is determined whether or not the second big hit flag is on (step S420 in FIG. 50). When it is determined in step S420 that the second big hit flag is on (step S420; Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S421). When the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S421; Yes), the value of the effect mode flag is updated to “2” (step S422), and then the variation pattern used in this special figure game. Then, the variation pattern α3 (big hit) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined (step S423).

  When it is determined in step S421 that the value of the effect mode flag is not “1” (step S421; No), it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “2”, and this special figure game for this time. 14 is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in (Step S424).

  When the second big hit flag is off in step S420 (step S420; No), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S425). When the value of the effect mode flag is “1” in step S425 (step S425; Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect pattern flag is “2” (step S426). When the value of the effect pattern flag is “2” in step S426 (step S426; Yes), the variation pattern α3 (normal loss) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in this special figure game. (Step S427).

  On the other hand, when the value of the effect pattern flag is a value other than “2” in step S426 (step S426; No), the variation pattern α3 (reach loss) shown in FIG. 14 is used as the variation pattern used in this special figure game. ) Is selected and determined (step S428). If it is determined in step S425 that the value of the effect mode flag is not “1” (step S425; No), it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “2”, and this time As the fluctuation pattern used in the figure game, the fluctuation pattern γ2 (normal loss) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined (step S429). After the variable display pattern is determined in any of steps S423, S424, S427, S428, and S429, the process proceeds to step S410 shown in FIG. 48, and the count value of the effect counter is incremented by one.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of a final effect pattern determination process executed in step S309 of FIG. In this final effect pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the second big hit flag is on (step S441). When the second big hit flag is on (step S441; Yes), by executing the big hit time adjustment pattern determination process described later, the variation patterns β1 (big hit) to β3 (big hit) shown in FIG. Among δ1 (big hit) to δ3 (big hit), a variation pattern in the current special figure game is determined (step S442).

  When it is determined in step S441 that the second big hit flag is off (step S441; No), it is determined whether the first big hit flag is on (step S443). At this time, when the first big hit flag is on, the continuous effect or the second effect as the first effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbol multiple times by the second special symbol display device 4B. Later, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variation display result in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. Therefore, when it is determined in step S443 that the first big hit flag is on (step S443; Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S444). When the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S444; Yes), a variation pattern β1 (reach loss) to β3 (reach loss) shown in FIG. 14 is executed by executing a first reach time adjustment pattern determination process described later. Among these, the variation pattern in this special figure game is determined (step S445).

  When it is determined in step S444 that the value of the effect mode flag is not “1” (step S444; No), it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “2”, and the effect pattern flag is set. It is determined whether the value of “2” is “2” (step S446). If the value of the effect pattern flag is other than “2” in step S446 (step S446; No), the second reach time adjustment pattern determination process described later is executed, thereby changing the variation pattern δ1 ( Among the reach loses) to δ3 (reach loses), a variation pattern in the current special figure game is determined (step S447).

  Furthermore, when it is determined in step S443 that the first big hit flag is off (step S443; No), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S448). . At this time, if the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S448; Yes), the fluctuation pattern β1 (normal loss) shown in FIG. ) To β3 (ordinary loss), a variation pattern in the special figure game this time is determined (step S449).

  When the value of the effect pattern flag is “2” in step S446 (step S446; Yes), or when it is determined in step S448 that the value of the effect mode flag is not “1” (step S448; No), by executing a second normal time adjustment pattern determination process to be described later, the variation pattern in the special figure game of this time is determined from among the variation patterns δ1 (normally lost) to δ3 (normally lost) shown in FIG. (Step S450).

  Thus, after the variable display pattern is determined by executing one of the processes of steps S442, S445, S447, S449, and S450, the second special symbol display device 4B is in the process of displaying the special symbol multiple times. A process is performed to prevent the first effect or the second effect from being performed in the subsequent variation display of the special symbol. That is, the value of the effect mode flag is updated to “0”, and the value of the effect pattern flag is set to “0” (step S451). In addition, the effect number counter is cleared and the count value is set to “0” (step S452).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit time adjustment pattern determination process executed in step S442 of FIG. In the big hit time adjustment pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S501). When it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S501; Yes), the timer value in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation patterns β1 (big hit) to β3 ( The timer initial values corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation times Ti110 to Ti112 in the big hit are compared (step S502). Thus, the first special symbol display device 4A compares the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the currently executed special symbol game with the variation time of the special symbol in each of the variation patterns β1 (big hit) to β3 (big hit). The

  As a result of the comparison in step S502, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti112 in the variation pattern β3 (big hit). (Step S503). When the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the fluctuation time Ti112 in the fluctuation pattern β3 (big hit) (step S503; Yes), the fluctuation pattern β3 (big hit) is selected. Determination is made (step S504).

  When it is determined in step S503 that the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the fluctuation time Ti112 in the fluctuation pattern β3 (big hit) (step S503; No), the first It is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti111 in the variation pattern β2 (big hit) (step S505). When the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the fluctuation time Ti111 in the fluctuation pattern β2 (big hit) (step S505; Yes), the fluctuation pattern β2 (big hit) is selected. Determination is made (step S506). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the fluctuation time Ti111 in the fluctuation pattern β2 (big hit) (step S505; No), the fluctuation pattern β1 (big hit) Is selected and determined (step S507).

  If it is determined in step S501 that the value of the effect mode flag is not “1” (step S501; No), it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “2” and the first variation is made. The timer value in the time timer is compared with the timer initial values corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation times Ti120 to Ti122 in the fluctuation patterns δ1 (big hit) to δ3 (big hit) shown in FIG. 14 (step S508). Thus, the first special symbol display device 4A compares the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the currently executed special symbol game with the variation time of the special symbol in each of the variation patterns δ1 (big hit) to δ3 (big hit). The

  As a result of the comparison in step S508, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti122 in the variation pattern δ3 (big hit) ( Step S509). When the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the fluctuation time Ti122 in the fluctuation pattern δ3 (big hit) (step S509; Yes), the fluctuation pattern δ3 (big hit) is selected. Determine (step S510).

  When it is determined in step S509 that the remaining variation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the variation time Ti122 in the variation pattern δ3 (big hit) (step S509; No), the first It is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti121 in the variation pattern δ2 (big hit) (step S511). When the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the fluctuation time Ti121 in the fluctuation pattern δ2 (big hit) (step S511; Yes), the fluctuation pattern δ2 (big hit) is selected. Determination is made (step S512). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the fluctuation time Ti121 in the fluctuation pattern δ2 (big hit) (step S511; No), the fluctuation pattern δ1 (big hit) Is selected and determined (step S513). In this way, the variation patterns β1 (big hit) to β3 (big hit), δ1 (big hit) to δ3 (big hit) shown in FIG. 14 according to the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. ) Is selected and determined as a variation pattern in the special symbol game or the like by the second special symbol display device 4B, so that the fixed symbol is derived and displayed in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. In a short period of time, it is possible to derive and display the fluctuation display result of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the first reach time adjustment pattern determination process executed in step S445 of FIG. In this first reach time adjustment pattern determination process, the timer values corresponding to the timer values in the first change time timer and the special symbol change times Ti53 to Ti55 in the change patterns β1 (reach lose) to β3 (reach lose) shown in FIG. The value is compared (step S521). As a result, the first special symbol display device 4A compares the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game currently being executed with the variation time of the special symbol in each of the variation patterns β1 (reach lose) to β3 (reach lose). The

  As a result of the comparison in step S521, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti55 in the variation pattern β3 (reach lose). (Step S522). When the remaining variation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti54 in the variation pattern β3 (reach loss) (step S522; Yes), the variation pattern β3 (reach loss) is selected. Determination is made (step S523).

  When it is determined in step S522 that the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the fluctuation time Ti55 in the fluctuation pattern β3 (reach lose) (step S522; No), It is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti54 in the variation pattern β2 (reach lose) (step S524). If the remaining variation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti53 in the variation pattern β2 (reach loss) (step S524; Yes), the variation pattern β2 (reach loss) is selected. Determine (step S525). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the fluctuation time Ti53 in the fluctuation pattern β2 (reach loss) (step S524; No), the fluctuation pattern β1 (reach loss) Is selected and determined (step S526). As described above, any one of the variation patterns β1 (reach loss) to β3 (reach loss) shown in FIG. 14 is selected according to the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. By determining the variable display pattern in the special symbol game or the like by the second special symbol display device 4B, the first special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is displayed in a short period after the fixed symbol is derived and displayed. The variation display result of the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4A can be derived and displayed.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the second reach time adjustment pattern determination process executed in step S447 of FIG. In the second reach time adjustment pattern determination process, the timer value corresponding to the first change time timer and the timer initial values corresponding to the change times Ti63 to Ti65 of the special symbols in the change patterns δ1 (reach lose) to δ3 (reach lose) shown in FIG. The value is compared (step S531). As a result, the first special symbol display device 4A compares the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game currently being executed with the variation time of the special symbol in each of the variation patterns δ1 (reach lose) to δ3 (reach lose). The

  As a result of the comparison in step S531, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti65 in the variation pattern δ3 (reach lose). (Step S532). When the remaining variation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti65 in the variation pattern δ3 (reach loss) (step S532; Yes), the variation pattern δ3 (reach loss) is selected. Determination is made (step S533).

  When it is determined in step S532 that the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the fluctuation time Ti65 in the fluctuation pattern δ3 (reach lose) (step S532; No), the first It is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti64 in the variation pattern δ2 (reach lose) (step S534). When the remaining variation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti64 in the variation pattern δ2 (reach loss) (step S534; Yes), the variation pattern δ2 (reach loss) is selected. Determine (step S535). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the fluctuation time Ti64 in the fluctuation pattern δ2 (reach loss) (step S534; No), the fluctuation pattern δ1 (reach loss) Is selected and determined (step S536). In this way, one of the variation patterns δ1 (reach loss) to δ3 (reach loss) shown in FIG. 14 is selected according to the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. By determining the variable display pattern in the special symbol game or the like by the second special symbol display device 4B, the first special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is displayed in a short period after the confirmed symbol is derived and displayed. The variation display result of the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4A can be derived and displayed.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the first normal time adjustment pattern determination process executed in step S449 of FIG. In the first normal time adjustment pattern determination process, the timer value in the first fluctuation time timer and the special symbol fluctuation times Ti50 to Ti52 in the fluctuation patterns β1 (normal loss) to β3 (normal loss) shown in FIG. The timer initial value is compared (step S541). Thereby, the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game currently being executed by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation time of the special symbol in each of the variation patterns β1 (normal loss) to β3 (normal loss). To be compared.

  As a result of the comparison in step S541, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti52 in the variation pattern β3 (normal loss). (Step S542). When the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the fluctuation time Ti52 in the fluctuation pattern β3 (normal loss) (step S542; Yes), the fluctuation pattern β3 (normal loss) Is selected and determined (step S543).

  When it is determined in step S542 that the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the fluctuation time Ti52 in the fluctuation pattern β3 (normal loss) (step S542; No), It is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti51 in the variation pattern β2 (normal loss) (step S544). When the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the fluctuation time Ti51 in the fluctuation pattern β2 (normal loss) (step S544; Yes), the fluctuation pattern β2 (normal loss) Is selected and determined (step S545). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the fluctuation time Ti51 in the fluctuation pattern β2 (normal loss) (step S544; No), the fluctuation pattern β1 (normal) “Lose” is selected and determined (step S546). In this way, one of the variation patterns β1 (normal loss) to β3 (normal loss) shown in FIG. 14 is selected according to the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. Then, by determining the variable display pattern in the special symbol game or the like by the second special symbol display device 4B, during a short period after the fixed symbol is derived and displayed in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, The variation display result of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A can be derived and displayed.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal time adjustment pattern determination process executed in step S450 of FIG. The second normal time adjustment pattern determination process corresponds to the timer value in the first fluctuation time timer and the special symbol fluctuation times Ti60 to Ti62 in the fluctuation patterns δ1 (normal loss) to δ3 (normal loss) shown in FIG. The timer initial value is compared (step S551). Thereby, the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game currently being executed by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation time of the special symbol in each of the variation patterns δ1 (normal loss) to δ3 (normal loss). To be compared.

  As a result of the comparison in step S551, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti62 in the variation pattern δ3 (normal loss). (Step S552). When the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the fluctuation time Ti62 in the fluctuation pattern δ3 (normal loss) (step S552; Yes), the fluctuation pattern δ3 (normal loss) Is selected and determined (step S553).

  When it is determined in step S552 that the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the fluctuation time Ti62 in the fluctuation pattern δ3 (normal loss) (step S552; No), It is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4A is longer than the variation time Ti61 in the variation pattern δ2 (normal loss) (step S554). When the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is longer than the fluctuation time Ti61 in the fluctuation pattern δ2 (normal loss) (step S554; Yes), the fluctuation pattern δ2 (normal loss) Is selected and determined (step S555). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the fluctuation time Ti61 in the fluctuation pattern δ2 (normal loss) (step S554; No), the fluctuation pattern δ1 (normal) “Lose” is selected and determined (step S556). In this way, one of the variation patterns δ1 (normal loss) to δ3 (normal loss) shown in FIG. 14 is selected according to the remaining variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. Then, by determining the variable display pattern in the special symbol game or the like by the second special symbol display device 4B, during a short period after the fixed symbol is derived and displayed in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, The variation display result of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A can be derived and displayed.

  Through the processing as described above, the special symbol is displayed a plurality of times performed by the second special symbol display device 4B before the confirmed symbol is derived and displayed after the special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A. During the variable display, it is possible to execute a continuous effect as a first effect first. That is, when the second special symbol display device 4B executes the first special symbol variation display, the second image display device 5B performs the ornament symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. The notification information 60a is displayed. Thereafter, if the variation display result in the special symbol game by the second image display device 5B does not become a big hit, every time the special symbol variation display is executed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the second image display device 5B The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and any one of the notification information 60b to 60d is displayed in the order from the notification information 60b shown in FIG. 21 (B) to the notification information 60d shown in FIG. 21 (D).

  On the other hand, when the variation display result in the special figure game by the second variation display device 4B becomes a big hit before the end of the continuous representation as the first representation, the special symbol is subsequently performed by the second variation display device 4B. When the variable display is executed, the second image display device 5B displays the decorative pattern, and any one of the images shown in FIGS. 21 (E) to (G) is displayed. The second effect, which is different from the continuous effect, is executed.

  The special effect game by the second special symbol display device 4B and the decorative symbol by the second image display device 5B are executed by executing the continuous effect pattern determination processing shown in FIGS. 48 to 50 and the final effect pattern determination processing shown in FIG. By determining the variation pattern in the variation display, any one of the production patterns P01 to P24 included in the big success time continuous production pattern as shown in FIG. 57 or included in the continuous production pattern at the time of loss as shown in FIG. In accordance with any of the effect patterns P31 to P54, the effect display mode in the effect operation performed together with the decorative pattern variation display by the second image display device 5B is determined. Here, the effect patterns P01 to P24 included in the big success time continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 57 are shown in FIGS. 48 to 50 when the variable display result in the special game by the first special symbol display device 4A is a big hit. The continuation effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 51 and the final effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 51 are executed. On the other hand, the effect patterns P31 to P54 included in the continuous effect pattern at the time of loss shown in FIG. 58 are shown in FIGS. 48 to 50 when the variation display result in the special game by the first special symbol display device 4A is lost. It is determined by executing the continuous effect pattern determination process and the final effect pattern determination process shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57, when the variation display result in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is a big hit, the second special symbol display is performed even when any of the effect patterns P01 to P24 is determined. In the four special drawing games by the device 4B, at least two times, the variation display mode of the decorative symbols by the second image display device 5B becomes reach. That is, when the variation display result in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is a big hit, the effect display notified by the notification information 60a as shown in FIG. A determination of the variation pattern is made to be performed. As a result, the first special symbol is displayed after the predetermined effect display is first notified in a plurality of special symbol games executed by the second special symbol display device 4B, and then the notified effect display is performed. The big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a variation display result of the special figure game on the display device 4A.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58, when the fluctuation display result in the special symbol game is not a big hit by the first special symbol display device 4A, while the special symbol game is performed four times by the second special symbol display device 4B, The number of times that the decorative pattern variation display mode is reached by the second image display device 5B may be less than twice notified by the notification information 60a as shown in FIG. That is, when any of the effect patterns P31, P39, P47, P49, and P51 included in the loss-time continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 57 is determined, the variation display mode of the decorative pattern by the second image display device 5B is reach. The number of times is one. In particular, when the special display game is performed four times by the second special symbol display device 4B and the variation display result does not become a big hit (is lost) in any special game, the effect pattern P39 or the effect pattern P47. Is determined, the number of times that the decorative image variation display mode by the second image display device 5B becomes reach is one. That is, when the variation display result in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is not a big hit, the effect display notified by the notification information 60a as shown in FIG. May not be executed. As a result, when a predetermined effect display is first notified in a plurality of special symbol games executed by the second special symbol display device 4B, and then the notified effect display is not performed, The lost symbol is derived and displayed as a variation display result of the special symbol game on the special symbol display device 4A.

  Next, the operation of the display control CPU 130 mounted on the display control board 12 will be described. In the display control board 12, the display control CPU 130 detects, for example, the occurrence of a timer interrupt every 33 milliseconds by determining whether or not a timer interrupt flag provided in the RAM 132 or the like is turned on, for example. Then, various timer interrupt processing programs stored in advance in the ROM 131 or the like for display control are executed. For example, the display control CPU 130 responds to the detection of the occurrence of the timer interruption in order to control the display operation in each of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. Execute process processing.

  In the first display control process, the value of the first display control process flag provided in the display control flag setting unit is used to control the display operation in the first image display device 5A according to a predetermined procedure. Updating is performed according to the display state in 5A, and various processes provided in advance corresponding to the value of the first display control process flag are selected and executed. In the second display control process, the value of the second display control process flag provided in the display control flag setting unit is used to control the display operation in the second image display device 5B according to a predetermined procedure. Updating is performed according to the display state on the display device 5B, and various processes provided in advance corresponding to the value of the second display control process flag are selected and executed.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed by the display control CPU 130 as the first display control process. In the first display control process shown in FIG. 59, the display control CPU 130 selects and executes the processes of steps S150 to S155 shown below according to the value of the first display control process flag.

  The variable display start command reception waiting process in step S150 is executed when the value of the first display control process flag is “0”. In this variation display start command reception waiting process, it is determined whether or not the first variation display start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received, whereby the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined. This includes processing for determining whether or not the variable display has been started. The decorative symbol variation display start process in step S151 is executed when the value of the first display control process flag is “1”. This decorative symbol variation display start process includes the variation display of the decorative symbol in the first image display device 5A in response to the special symbol being varied and displayed in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. In order to perform various display effects, for example, the display operation of the first image display device 5A is set, such as processing for selecting one corresponding to the variation pattern from among a plurality of types of table data stored in the ROM 131. Includes processing for. Further, in the decorative symbol variation display start process in step S151, based on the variation pattern designated by the first variation display start command from the main board 11, the type of the confirmed special symbol notified by the first special symbol notification command, or the like. Then, the combination of the decorative symbols to be the determined decorative symbols is determined by the variable display of the decorative symbols by the first image display device 5A.

  The decorative symbol variation display process in step S152 is executed when the value of the first display control process flag is “2”. This decorative symbol variation display processing includes processing for controlling the display operation during decorative symbol variation display by the first image display device 5A. The decorative symbol stop waiting process in step S153 is executed when the value of the first display control process flag is “3”. This decorative symbol stop waiting process includes a process of ending the decorative symbol variation display on the first image display device 5A in response to receiving the first variation display end command transmitted from the main board 11. Yes. More specifically, in step S153, the display control CPU 130 determines whether or not the first variation display end command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received within a predetermined reception waiting time. And when it cannot receive, predetermined error processing is performed, for example. On the other hand, when it is received, it is determined whether or not the fixed decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the first image display device 5A is stopped and displayed is a big hit combination or a lost combination. In some cases, the value of the first display control process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, in the case of the lost combination, the value of the first display control process flag is updated to “0”. Note that the display control CPU 130 may update the value of the display control process flag to “4” when a predetermined jackpot start command transmitted from the main board 11 is received in step S153.

  The big hit display process in step S154 is executed when the value of the first display control process flag is “4”. This big hit display process includes a process of displaying an image corresponding to the big hit gaming state by controlling the display operation in the first image display device 5A. For example, by displaying on the first image display device 5A the number of rounds corresponding to a predetermined jackpot round number instruction command transmitted from the main board 11, the number of rounds being executed in the jackpot gaming state for the player Can be notified in an identifiable manner. When the round executed in the big hit gaming state becomes the final round (for example, 15 rounds), the value of the first display control process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the big hit end process. The big hit end display process in step S155 is executed when the value of the first display control process flag is “5”. This big hit end display process includes a process for controlling the effect display for notifying that the big hit gaming state has ended in the first image display device 5A.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation display start process executed in step S151 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation display start process, the display control CPU 130 first identifies the variation pattern by, for example, reading EXT data in the first variation display start command transmitted from the main board 11 (step S561). Further, the display control CPU 130, for example, reads the EXT data in the first special symbol notification command transmitted from the main board 11 to determine the special to be a variable display result in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The type of symbol is specified (step S562). Then, it is determined whether or not the type of display result specified at this time is a probable big hit (step S563).

  When it is determined in step S563 that it is a probable big hit (step S563; Yes), FIG. 26B shows a table for determining a fixed decorative symbol to be derived and displayed as a decorative symbol variation display result. The determined symbol design table 141 for the probability variation big hit is set (step S564). If it is determined in step S563 that it is not a probable big hit (step S563; No), it is determined whether the type of display result specified in step S562 is a normal big hit (step S565). Then, when it is determined that it is a normal big hit (step S565; Yes), a normal big hit shown in FIG. 26A is used as a table for determining a confirmed decorative symbol to be derived and displayed as a variation display result of the decorative symbol. The time-decided decorative symbol determination table 140 is set (step S566).

  After setting the confirmed decorative symbol determination table in either of the processes of steps S564 and S566, the random value SR1 for determining the jackpot symbol / left determined symbol is extracted (step S567), and the extracted random value By referring to the determined decorative symbol determination table set based on SR1, a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is determined (step S568).

  When it is determined in step S565 that it is not a normal big hit (step S565; No), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern specified in step S561 is a reach loss pattern (step S569).

  When it is determined in step S569 that the pattern is a reach-losing pattern (step S569; Yes), a random value SR1 for determining the big hit symbol / left determined symbol is extracted (step S570), and based on the extracted random value SR1. By referring to the left determined decorative symbol determination table 142 shown in FIG. 27A, the fixed decorative symbol derived and displayed on the “left” variable display portion DL in the first image display device 5A as the decorative symbol variable display result. (Left fixed symbol) is determined (step S571). Subsequently, a confirmed decorative symbol (right determined symbol) that is derived and displayed on the “right” variable display portion DR of the first image display device 5A as a decorative symbol variable display result as a decorative symbol having the same symbol number as the left determined symbol. ) (Step S572). Further, for example, the addition value determined using the medium-decorated decorative symbol determination table 143 shown in FIG. 27B based on the random value SR2 for determining the medium-determined symbol is added to the symbol number of the left determined symbol determined in step S571. As a result, an arbitrary decorative design different from the left and right determined symbols is derived and displayed on the “middle” variable display unit DC in the first image display device 5A as a decorative display variable display result (middle). (Determined symbol) is determined (step S573).

  When it is determined in step S569 that the pattern is not a reach loss pattern (step S569; No), it is determined that the variation display result of the decorative symbol is a normal loss, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a combination of the normal loses is determined. Execute the process for That is, by extracting the random value SR1 for determining the jackpot symbol / left determined symbol (step S574), referring to the left determined decorative symbol determining table 142 shown in FIG. 27A based on the extracted random value SR1, The left confirmed symbol is determined (step S575). Subsequently, a random value SR2 for determining the medium fixed symbol is extracted (step S576), and the added value determined with reference to the medium fixed decorative symbol determination table 143 shown in FIG. By adding, a medium fixed symbol is determined (step S577). Further, a random number SR3 for determining the right determined symbol is extracted (step S578), and the added value determined with reference to the right determined decorative symbol determining table 144 shown in FIG. 27C is added to the symbol number of the left determined symbol. As a result, the right determined symbol is determined (step S579). The determined decorative symbol determined by such processing is, for example, data that can specify the fixed decorative symbol in a predetermined storage unit (for example, the fixed decorative symbol storage unit) provided in the RAM 132 (as a specific example, It is preferable to store the data by storing (designation number data).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S568, S573, and S579, a fluctuation speed / direction data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified in step S561 is set (step S580). For example, when the fluctuation pattern A1 is specified in step S561, the fluctuation speed / direction data table T31 shown in FIG. 35A is set. When the variation pattern B1 is specified in step S561, the variation speed / direction data table T32 shown in FIG. 35B is set. Furthermore, when any of the variation patterns C1 to C3 is specified in step S561, variation speed / direction data tables T331 to T333 shown in FIGS. 36 (A) to (C) are set.

  At this time, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern B1 is specified in step S561 (step S581). When the variation pattern B1 is specified (step S581; Yes), it is determined that the variation pattern is accompanied by a return variation of the return amount in accordance with the confirmed decorative design, and return position data as shown in FIG. , Etc., for example, the return amount of the determined decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, DR is specified (step S582). Subsequently, information such as the fluctuation speed and fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation speed / direction data table T32 set in step S580 so that the specified return amount is achieved (step S583). In the processing of steps S582 and S583, control data prepared in advance for each confirmed decorative symbol may be set, or each time a confirmed decorative symbol is determined, the return amount is specified by calculation or the like. Data may be generated and set.

  When a variation pattern other than the variation pattern B1 is specified in step S581 (step S581; No), the processing in steps S582 and S583 is skipped. Thereafter, a timer initial value corresponding to the variation time of the decorative pattern in the variation pattern is set in the first display control timer (step S584), and the value of the first display control process flag is associated with the decorative symbol variation display process. The value is updated to “2” (step S585).

  Further, as the second display control process executed to control the display operation in the second image display device 5B, the first display control process shown in FIG. 59 is adapted to the second image display device 5B. It suffices if processing is executed. For example, the display control CPU 130 selects and executes a process in which each process of steps S150 to S155 shown in FIG. 59 is adapted to the second image display device 5B according to the value of the second display control process flag. .

  For example, in the variable display start command reception waiting process executed when the value of the second display control process flag is “0”, has the special symbol variable display in the special symbol game started by the second special symbol display device 4B started? It includes processing for determining whether or not. The decorative symbol variation display start process executed when the value of the second display control process flag is “1” is when the variation display of the special symbol is started in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to provide various display effects including decorative pattern variation display by the second image display device 5B, for example, one corresponding to the variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types of table data stored in the ROM 131. This includes processing for setting the display operation of the second image display device 5B, such as processing. In the decorative symbol variation display start process executed when the value of the second display control process flag is “1”, the variation pattern designated by the second variation display start command from the main board 11 or the second special pattern is displayed. Based on the type of the confirmed special symbol notified by the symbol notification command or the like, the combination of the decorative symbol that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is determined by the variation display of the decorative symbol by the second image display device 5B.

  The decorative symbol variation display processing executed when the value of the second display control process flag is “2” includes processing for controlling the display operation during the decorative symbol variation display by the second image display device 5B. . The decorative symbol stop waiting process executed when the value of the second display control process flag is “3” is the second image in response to receiving the second variable display end command transmitted from the main board 11. This includes a process for ending the variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 5B. More specifically, in the decorative symbol stop waiting process executed when the value of the second display control process flag is “3”, the second variation display end command transmitted from the main board 11 by the display control CPU 130 is predetermined. It is determined whether or not reception is possible within the reception waiting time. And when it cannot receive, predetermined error processing is performed, for example. On the other hand, when it is received, it is determined whether or not the definite decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the second image display device 5B are displayed as a big hit combination or a lost combination. In some cases, the value of the second display control process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, in the case of the lost combination, the value of the second display control process flag is updated to “0”. The display control CPU 130 receives a predetermined jackpot start command transmitted from the main board 11 in the decorative symbol stop waiting process executed when the value of the second display control process flag is “3”. The value of the display control process flag may be updated to “4”. The big hit display process executed when the value of the second display control process flag is “4” is a process of displaying an image corresponding to the big hit gaming state by controlling the display operation in the second image display device 5B. Is included. The big hit end display process executed when the value of the second display control process flag is “5” is a process of controlling the effect display for notifying that the big hit gaming state has ended in the second image display device 5B. Etc.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation display process executed when the value of the second display control process flag is “2”. When the decorative symbol variation display process shown in FIG. 61 is started, the display control CPU 130 first adds, for example, 1 to the timer value in the second display control timer provided in the display control timer setting unit. The timer value of the display control timer is updated (step S591). Subsequently, whether or not the second display control timer has timed out, for example, by checking whether or not the timer value in the second display control timer has reached a variation end reference value determined in accordance with the variation pattern. (Step S592; Yes), the second display control process flag value is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol stop waiting process (step S593). ).

  When it is determined in step S592 that the second display control timer has not timed out (step S592; No), the display control CPU 130 controls the image display operation in the second image display device 5B to change the decorative pattern. An image display control process for performing display is executed (step S594). Here, the image display control process is performed every time the decorative symbol variation display process is executed. In other words, the image display control process is executed in response to the occurrence of the timer interruption after the decorative display of the decorative pattern in any of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B is started. This is executed every time a predetermined time is measured. In step S594, the display control CPU 130 executes processing corresponding to step S580 shown in FIG. 60 in the decorative symbol variation display processing executed when the value of the second display control process flag is “2”, for example. Thus, various image display control processes corresponding to the decorative pattern variation pattern can be executed by reading the variation speed / direction data table set corresponding to the decorative pattern variation pattern.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a process when the decorative design is variably displayed in any one of the variation patterns A1 to A3 as an example of the image display control process executed in step S594 shown in FIG. In the image display control process shown in FIG. 62, the display control CPU 130 first executes a process for specifying image data to be developed on the VRAM 135 at that time. In this process, first, the animation fluctuation index number is updated (step S601). At this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined animation fluctuation waiting time has elapsed since the last update of the animation fluctuation index number. If it is determined that the animation fluctuation index number has passed, the animation fluctuation index number is updated. If it is determined that it is not, the animation change index number may not be updated. Here, the animation fluctuation waiting time that determines the timing for updating the animation fluctuation index number may be the same as the execution interval of the image display control process, or may be set to a longer time. If the animation change waiting time is set to a short time, the animation moves faster, whereas if the animation change waiting time is set to a long time, the animation moves slower. In this way, by switching the decorative pattern every time the animation variation waiting time elapses, it is possible to display an animation such as a flip book.

  Subsequently, for example, based on the elapsed time since the display of the decorative symbol specified by the timer value of the second display control timer or the like is started, the variation speed / direction data table corresponding to the decorative symbol variation pattern is referred to. As a result, the change direction at that time is specified, and the number of extracted symbols with respect to the change direction is specified by referring to the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A based on the specified change direction (step) S602). Then, the extracted decorative symbol is specified from the symbols (numerals # 1) included in the decorative symbol # 1 based on the number of extracted symbols specified in step S602, the arrangement of decorative symbols, and the current variation display state. (Step S603). At this time, the display control CPU 130 refers to the variation speed / direction of the decorative pattern identified by referring to the variation speed / direction data table corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, and the number specified from the index data table T11. Based on the arrangement order of the image data of # 1, etc., the arrangement information of the decorative symbols to be changed by the animation change is specified. The image data of the decorative pattern specified in step S603 becomes image data to be developed on the VRAM 135.

  Next, the decorative symbols identified in step S603 are virtually arranged in a predesignated arrangement (vertical arrangement or horizontal arrangement) at the corresponding enlargement ratio and rotation angle (step S604). At this stage, it is not necessary to actually arrange the image data. For example, data that can specify the arrangement of the decorative symbols may be generated. Thereafter, the position (display range) of the display area on the virtually arranged image is specified from the immediately preceding position, the changing speed and the changing direction (step S605). More specifically, in step S605, the display control CPU 130 refers to the variation speed / direction data table corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative design, and specifies the variation speed and variation direction of the decorative design. Then, by determining the amount and size of movement of the display area from the data indicating the position and variation direction of the display area immediately before the process of step S605 is executed, the display area for displaying the decorative design can be specified. it can. Subsequently, by referring to the index data table T11 shown in FIG. 31 based on the decorative design specified in step S603 or the animation change index number updated in step S601, the decorative design to be displayed in the CGROM 134 is displayed. Is specified (step S606). At this time, the display control CPU 130 determines whether the change display target is based on the decorative pattern arrangement information specified in step S603 and the animation change index number updated (or not updated) in step S601. The image data of the decorative pattern is specified. After the image data of the number # 1 included in the decorative design # 1 is specified in this way, the display control CPU 130 addresses, arrangement, enlargement / reduction ratio, and transmittance of the image data of the number # 1 to be developed on the VRAM 135. Then, a drawing command and / or attribute data for designating a clipping range is generated and transmitted to the VDP 133 (step S607).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a process when a decorative symbol is variably displayed in the variation pattern B1, as another example of the image display control process executed in step S594 shown in FIG. In the image display control process shown in FIG. 63, the display control CPU 130 first executes a process for specifying image data to be developed on the VRAM 135 at that time. In this process, first, for example, based on the elapsed time since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified from the timer value of the second display control timer, the variation speed / direction data corresponding to the variable pattern of the decorative symbol By referring to the fluctuation speed / direction data table T32 shown in FIG. 35 (B) as a table, the fluctuation direction and the presence / absence of animation fluctuation at that time are specified. At the same time, by referring to the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A based on the identified variation direction, the number of extracted symbols with respect to the variation direction is identified (step S611).

  Then, depending on the number of extracted symbols specified in step S611, the arrangement of decorative symbols, the presence / absence of animation variation, and the current variation display state, the decorative symbols to be extracted are included in the symbols (numbers # 2 and # 2). The combination with character # 1 is specified (step S612). At this time, the display control CPU 130 refers to the variation speed / direction of the decorative symbol specified by referring to the variation speed / direction data table corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, and the number specified from the index data table T12. Based on the arrangement order of the image data of # 2 and character # 1, etc., the arrangement information of the decorative symbols to be subjected to the variable display is specified. Further, for example, when the animation variation is not performed as in the case where the data “no animation” is read from the variation speed / direction data table T32, each symbol (number # 2 or number # 2) included in the decorative symbol # 2 is used. The image of the display mode (for example, the display mode corresponding to the animation fluctuation index number “1”) is specified for the character # 1). On the other hand, if animation variation is performed, for example, when “animation present” data is read from the variation speed / direction data table T32, each symbol included in the decorative symbol # 2 is subjected to the animation variation. An image in a display mode (a display mode corresponding to an animation change index number corresponding to any of “1” to “10”) is specified. Here, in the case of performing animation variation, the animation variation index number is updated to “1” to “10” by updating the animation variation index number in the same manner as the processing of step S601 shown in FIG. Any one may be determined. The image data of the decorative design specified in this way becomes image data to be developed on the VRAM 135.

  Subsequently, the decorative symbols identified in step S612 are virtually arranged in a predesignated arrangement (vertical arrangement or horizontal arrangement) at the corresponding enlargement ratio and rotation angle (step S613). At this stage, it is not necessary to actually arrange the image data. For example, data that can specify the arrangement of the decorative symbols may be generated. Thereafter, the position (display range) of the display area on the virtually arranged image is specified from the immediately preceding position, the fluctuation speed / fluctuation direction, the presence / absence of animation fluctuation, and the like (step S614). More specifically, in step S614, the display control CPU 130 refers to the variation speed / direction data table corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative design, and specifies the variation speed and variation direction of the decorative design. Then, by determining the amount and size of movement of the display area from the data indicating the position and variation direction of the display area immediately before the process of step S614 is performed, the display area for displaying the decorative design can be specified. it can. Subsequently, an area to be clipped of the virtually arranged image is specified based on the position and size of the display area (step S615).

  Thereafter, the decorative design to be displayed in the CGROM 134 is stored by referring to the index data table T12 shown in FIG. 32 corresponding to the decorative design specified in step S612 and the display mode of the decorative design. Is identified (step S616). At this time, the display control CPU 130 determines the decorative pattern specified in step S612 when no animation change is made, for example, when “no animation” data is read from the change speed / direction data table T32. Based on the arrangement information, the decorative pattern image data to be subjected to the variable display is specified. On the other hand, when the animation changes, for example, when “animation present” data is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T32, the arrangement information of the decorative pattern specified in step S612 and the animation change Based on the index number, the image data of the decorative design to be changed is specified. After the image data of the number # 2 and the character # 1 included in the decorative design # 2 is specified in this way, the display control CPU 130 addresses and arrangement of the image data of the number # 2 and the character # 1 to be developed on the VRAM 135. Then, a drawing command and / or attribute data for designating the enlargement / reduction ratio, transmittance, clipping range, etc. is generated and transmitted to the VDP 133 (step S617).

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a process when a decorative symbol is variably displayed in any one of the variation patterns C1 to C3 as still another example of the image display control process executed in step S594 shown in FIG. It is. In the image display control process shown in FIG. 64, the display control CPU 130 first executes a process for specifying image data to be developed on the VRAM 135 at that time. In this process, first, for example, based on the elapsed time since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified from the timer value of the second display control timer, the fluctuation speed / direction data corresponding to the decorative pattern variation pattern By referring to the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 to T333 shown in FIGS. 36A to 36C as tables, the fluctuation direction and the presence or absence of animation fluctuation at that time are specified. At the same time, by referring to the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A based on the identified variation direction, the number of extracted symbols with respect to the variation direction is identified (step S621).

  Then, depending on the number of extracted symbols identified in step S621, the arrangement of decorative symbols, the presence / absence of animation variation, and the current variation display state, the decorative symbols to be extracted are included in the symbols (numbered ring and number) included in the decorative symbol # 3. (A combination with character # 2 or character # 3)) (step S622). At this time, the display control CPU 130 refers to the variation speed and direction of the decorative pattern identified by referring to the variation speed / direction data table corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, and the number specified from the index data table T13. Based on the attached ring and the arrangement order of the image data of the characters # 2 and # 3, the arrangement information of the decorative symbols to be subjected to the variable display is specified. If animation variation is not performed, a display state (for example, the animation variation index number is set to “1”) for each symbol (ring with numbers and characters # 2, # 3) included in the decorative symbol # 3. If the image of the corresponding display mode) is specified and animation variation is performed, the display mode corresponding to the animation variation (the animation variation index number is “1” to “5”) for each symbol included in the decorative pattern # 3. The image of the display mode corresponding to any of the above is specified. The image data of the decorative design specified in this way becomes data to be developed on the VRAM 135.

  Subsequently, the decorative symbols specified in step S622 are virtually arranged in a predesignated arrangement (vertical arrangement or horizontal arrangement) at the corresponding enlargement ratio and rotation angle (step S623). At this stage, it is not necessary to actually arrange the image data. For example, data that can specify the arrangement of the decorative symbols may be generated. Thereafter, the position (display range) of the display area on the virtually arranged image is specified from the immediately preceding position, the changing speed / change direction, the presence / absence of animation change, and the like (step S624). More specifically, in step S624, the display control CPU 130 refers to the variation speed / direction data table corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative design, and specifies the variation speed and variation direction of the decorative design. Then, by determining the amount of movement and the size of the display area from data indicating the position and variation direction of the display area immediately before the process of step S624 is performed, the display area for displaying the decorative design can be specified. it can. Subsequently, an area to be clipped of the virtually arranged image is specified based on the position and size of the display area (step S625).

  After this, refer to the index data table T13 shown in FIG. 33 corresponding to the decorative design specified in step S612, the display mode of the decorative design, or the elapsed time since the start of the variable display of the decorative design. By doing this, the address at which the decorative symbol to be displayed is stored in the CGROM 134 is specified (step S626). At this time, the display control CPU 130 specifies in step S622 when the animation change is not performed, for example, when “no animation” data is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 to T333. Based on the arrangement information of the decorative design, the image data of the decorative design to be subjected to the variable display is specified. On the other hand, when the animation variation is performed, for example, when “animation present” data is read from the variation speed / direction data tables T331 to T333, the decorative pattern arrangement information identified in step S622 and the animation Based on the index number of the change, the image data of the decorative design to be changed is specified. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the data of “image C” or “image D” has been read from the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 to T333 (step S627). At this time, if it is determined that the data of “image C” or “image D” has been read (step S627; Yes), for example, the elapsed time from the start of the decorative display of the decorative pattern, or the ring effect image The display mode of the ring effect image is specified based on the display order of the ring effects, and the index data table T13 shown in FIG. The address where the image is stored is specified (step S628). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S627 that the data of “image C” or “image D” has not been read (step S627; No), the process of step S628 is skipped.

  After the numbered ring included in the decorative design # 2, the image data of the characters # 2 and # 3, and the image data of the ring effect image are specified, the display control CPU 130 adds the numbers to be developed on the VRAM 135. Generate drawing commands and / or attribute data to specify the address and arrangement of ring, character # 2 and # 3 image data, enlargement / reduction ratio, transparency, clipping range, presence / absence of synthesis with ring effect image, etc. And transmitted to the VDP 133 (step S629).

  Further, in the image display control process when the decorative design is variably displayed in any one of the variation patterns α1 to α3, β1 to β3, γ1, γ2, and δ1 to δ3, the variation speed / direction corresponding to the variation pattern, respectively. By referring to the data table or the like, a drawing command or attribute data for specifying an address of image data such as the notification information 60a to 60d is transmitted to the VDP 133.

  Next, the operation of the VDP 133 mounted on the display control board 12 will be described. The VDP 133 executes processing for displaying an image on each of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B based on the drawing command and attribute data transmitted from the display control CPU 130. FIG. 65A is a flowchart showing an example of a display image generation process executed by the VDP 133 based on a drawing command or attribute data transmitted from the display control CPU 130. In this display image generation process, the VDP 133 first reads image data from the address of the CGROM 134 designated by the drawing command from the display control CPU 130 or attribute data (step S651).

  Subsequently, the VDP 133 performs image processing such as enlargement / reduction / rotation / transmission on the image data read out in step S651, rearranges the image data, and develops it in the work area on the VRAM 135 (step S652). Thereafter, the VDP 133 performs clipping at the size and position of the display area by clipping the image data within the clipping range notified from the display control CPU 130 (step S653).

  Further, the VDP 133 determines whether or not there is a synthesis with the ring effect image based on the notification from the display control CPU 130 (step S654). At this time, if it is determined that there is a combination with the ring effect image (step S654; Yes), a process for combining the decorative design image clipped in step S653 and the ring effect image is executed. (Step S655). In this process, for example, a ring effect image that is the current display target is specified based on a notification from the display control CPU 130, the image data is read from the CGROM 134, and each symbol developed in the work area on the VRAM 135 is displayed. Expand at the same magnification. In step S653, the ring effect image is clipped in the display area having the same size and position as when the decorative symbol is clipped. The ring effect image clipped in this way is combined with the decorative image clipping image developed on the VRAM 135, so that the decorative image and the ring effect image are combined. When it is determined in step S654 that there is no synthesis with the ring effect image, the display image generation process is terminated without executing the process of step S655.

  Further, the VDP 133 executes an image display interrupt process as shown in FIG. This image display interrupt process is executed in response to a timer interrupt generated at a predetermined periodic timing (for example, every 33 milliseconds). In the image display interrupt process shown in FIG. 65 (B), the VDP 133 reads out image data such as a decorative design and a ring effect image that are displayed on the VRAM 135, and displays the first and second images. This is provided to any one of the LCD drive circuits 136A and 136B provided corresponding to each of the display devices 5A and 5B (step S661). Thereby, in the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, an image of a decorative design, an image for a ring effect, a background image, etc. are displayed on the screen.

  Hereinafter, as a specific example of the display operation in the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, a case where the decorative symbols are variably displayed in any one of the variation patterns A1 to A3, B3, and C1 to C3 will be described. .

  When the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in any of the variation patterns A1 to A3, the number # 1 included in the decorative symbol # 1 is displayed in a variable manner in a predetermined variation direction during the variation display. As shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, even if the same symbol (number) is used, an animation display in which the symbol pattern gradually changes with the passage of time is performed.

  In the variation pattern A2 as shown in FIG. 15B, for example, in the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in the “middle” variable display portion DC after reaching reach, a certain symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. After that, two decorative designs are displayed overlapping each other while changing the transparency, so that the design gradually becomes transparent, the next design appears with high transparency, and the transparency becomes gradually lower repeat. That is, in this case, the display area in the “middle” variable display portion DC is for one decorative design, but two decorative designs are displayed while being sequentially exchanged.

  In the variation pattern A3 as shown in FIG. 15 (C), for example, in the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in the “middle” variable display unit DC after reaching reach, the decorative symbol moves side by side from side to side. A horizontal scrolling display that fluctuates as described above is performed. During this scroll display, for example, as shown in FIG. 67, the transparency of the decorative pattern differs depending on the position in the display area. FIG. 15C and FIG. 67 differ in the number of decorative symbols in the horizontal scroll display. FIG. 67 is a reference diagram for explaining the distribution of transparency of each decorative symbol.

  Next, an example of the image processing operation in the variation display state with the variation pattern A1 as shown in FIG. When the decorative design is displayed in a variation pattern A1, a variation speed / direction data table T31 shown in FIG. 35A is used. In this example, each image is considered to be arranged in a matrix as shown in FIG. 2 based on the arrangement of decorative symbols and the variation order of symbols.

  First, one of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, and DR in any of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B corresponding to the variation pattern A1. It is assumed that the symbol displayed in is a decorative symbol # 1 indicating the number # 1 of “6” to “8” as indicated by the area AE1 in FIG. In this case, it is assumed that the position of the area AE1 is the position of the display area and is located at a location including the number # 1 of “6” to “8”. In this state, it is assumed that the fluctuation direction is designated as “standard (↓)” in the fluctuation speed / direction data table T31.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 2, the variation display of the decorative design # 1 is roughly made up of areas AE1 (6, 7, 8), AE2 (5, 6, 7), AE3 (4, 5, 6), ... and change sequentially. However, instead of discretely changing the areas AE1, AE2, AE3,..., The display changes smoothly (continuously).

  More specifically, the display control CPU 130 specifies an animation variation index number. Here, the animation variation index number in the decorative pattern # 1 used in the variation pattern A1 is incremented by 1 every time a predetermined animation variation waiting time elapses, and the number ranges from “1” to “5”. It is updated (step S601 in FIG. 62), and it is specified which display mode (pattern) image is selected for each symbol. Further, when the change direction is “standard (↓)” by the entry in the first row in the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A, the display control CPU 130 is an area that becomes the display area. The number of decorative symbols (number of extracted symbols) to be extracted with the size of AE1 is specified as “4” (step S602).

  Thereafter, one of the numbers # 1 in the decorative design # 1 to be displayed is specified as the design to be extracted (step S603). For example, when the number # 1 indicating “5” to “8” is specified as the symbol to be extracted, the symbols are virtually arranged in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 68 (A). (Step S604). Also, in the horizontal direction, in the order in which the animation variation index number increases from “1” to “5”, the same symbols (symbol numbers) with different display modes (patterns) are virtually arranged. Be placed. In the arrangement shown in FIG. 68A, the direction of “animation variation” is set to the x coordinate, and the x coordinate increases as the index number of “animation variation” increases from “1” to “5”. Shall. Also, the direction of the “symbol array” in the arrangement shown in FIG. 68A is set to the y coordinate, and the y coordinate increases as the symbol number in the “symbol array” increases from “5” to “8”. Shall.

  In this example, the index number of animation variation is also used as data for specifying the elapsed time since a predetermined symbol is selected, and is set to “1” as an initial value. At this time, based on the fact that the animation variation index number is “1”, it is defined as “reference position” corresponding to “standard (↓)” in the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. A display area starting from the xy coordinates (0, 150) is provided (step S605). Then, as the animation change index number increases by 1, the value “150” defined as “x” in the display area size data table T20 is added to the value of the x coordinate at the start point of the display area. For example, when the animation variation index number is “2”, the xy coordinates of the start point in the display area are (150, 150). Note that, as data for specifying the elapsed time since the symbol was selected, a timer value in a separately provided timer may be used.

  In the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A, combinations of values (150) in which the size of the display area when the variation direction is “standard (↓)” are defined as “x” and “y”. , 460). Therefore, an area surrounded by xy coordinates (0, 150) and 150 (dots) in the x direction and 460 (dots) in the y direction is the position of the display area on the arranged image. It will be specified as AE1 (step S605). Thereafter, every time the animation variation index number is updated to “2”, “3”,..., The variation rate of the decorative symbol (variation start) from the variation rate / direction data table T31 shown in FIG. , And the count value of the counter are sequentially read out and the display area y is read. The position of the display area on the arranged image is moved upward by subtracting the coordinate by a value corresponding to the fluctuation speed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the position of the display area is changed to areas AE1, AE11, AE12, AE13, and AE2 as the animation variation index number sequentially increases from “1” to “5”. Will move.

  The display control CPU 130 specifies the address of the image data to be read from the CGROM 134 by referring to the index data table T11 shown in FIG. 31 based on the symbol number of the decorative symbol # 1 to be displayed and the index number of the animation variation. Then, a drawing command and / or attribute data is transmitted to the VDP 133 (step S607). Based on the drawing command and / or attribute data from the display control CPU 130, the VDP 133 reads out the image data of the decorative pattern # 1 to be displayed from the CGROM 134 and develops it in the work area of the VRAM 135 (step in FIG. 65A). S651), the image clipped with the size and position of the specified display area is handled in the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B every predetermined time (for example, 33 milliseconds) that is, for example, one frame time. The process of displaying on the object is repeated (step S653 in FIG. 65A and step S661 in FIG. 65B).

  Thus, when the display area moves upward by 150 (dots) (the direction in which the y coordinate value decreases), it reaches an area AE2 shown in FIGS. 2 and 68A. At this time, the animation variation index number is initialized to “1”, and the number # 1 indicating “4” to “7” is specified as the symbol to be extracted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the display control CPU 130 arranges the symbols of the number # 1 indicating “4” to “7” in the vertical direction, and in the horizontal direction the index number of the animation variation. Are arranged side by side in the order of increasing from “1” to “5” in the same pattern (symbol number) with different display modes (patterns). When the animation change index number is “5”, the animation change index number is initialized to “1” in the next process.

  Subsequently, the position of the display area is set to a position where the xy coordinate, which is the reference position indicated by the area AE2, starts from (0, 150), and the animation variation index number is sequentially changed from “1” to “5”. As the number increases, the position of the display area is moved to areas AE2, AE21, AE22, AE23, and AE3. Thereafter, the same operation is repeated, and scroll display of the decorative design # 1 is performed by repeating these operations for each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, and DR. Can do.

  The same processing is executed when performing scroll display in the horizontal direction. However, when the decorative design image data is expanded on the VRAM 135, it is designated by the “number of extracted designs” and “enlargement ratio” in the fifth and sixth entries in the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, seven decorative symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction and expanded by 0.8 times. Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 69, the position of the display area is continuously moved in the direction from the area AF1 to AF5, so that the decorative pattern fluctuates so as to move from right to left. Scroll display can be performed. In FIG. 69, a decorative design # 1 composed of the number # 1 of the design numbers “0” to “9” is arranged, and the areas AF1 to AF5 are large enough to include eight decorative designs. However, the symbols that are actually arranged are seven symbols in the horizontal direction, and the areas AF1 to AF5 have a size that includes approximately 6.5 symbols.

  Next, an example of the image processing operation in the variation display state with the variation pattern B1 as shown in FIGS. In the case where the decorative design is variably displayed in the variation pattern B1, a variation speed / direction data table T32 shown in FIG. 35 (B) is used. At this time, the display control CPU 130 changes the variation speed, the variation time, etc. so that the return amount of the fixed decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, DR is achieved. Is set in the fluctuation speed / direction data table T32 (steps S582 and S583 in FIG. 60). In this example, the fixed decorative symbol in the “left” variable display portion DL is a decorative symbol # 2 composed of a combination of the number # 2 indicating “3” and the character # 1 indicating “horse”, and the “right” Assume that the confirmed decorative symbol in the variable display section DR is decorative symbol # 2 composed of a combination of a number # 2 indicating “4” and a character # 1 indicating “cover”.

  First, one of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, and DR in one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B corresponding to the variation pattern B1. Assume that the currently displayed symbol is a decorative symbol # 2 composed of a combination of a number # 2 indicating “6” and a character # 1 indicating “elephant”. In this case, it is considered that the position of the display area is at a location including the number # 2 indicating “6” and the character # 1 indicating “elephant”. In this state, in the fluctuation speed / direction data table T32, it is assumed that the fluctuation direction is designated as “one symbol (↓)”.

  In this case, the variation display of the decorative design # 2 is roughly made up of a number # 2 indicating “6”, a number # 2 indicating “5”, a number # 2 indicating “4”,. Character # 1 corresponding to). However, the display changes smoothly (continuously) instead of discretely.

  More specifically, the display control CPU 130 displays the display area when the change direction is “1 symbol (↓)” by the entry in the third row in the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. The number of decorative symbols (number of extracted symbols) to be extracted corresponding to is specified as “2” (step S611 in FIG. 63). Thereafter, any one of the combination of the number # 2 and the character # 1 in the decorative design # 2 to be displayed is specified as the design to be extracted (step S612). For example, when the currently displayed symbol is a decorative symbol # 2 composed of a combination of the character # 1 indicating “6” and the character # 1 indicating “elephant”, the number # 2 indicating “6” and “ The decorative pattern # 2 composed of the combination of the number # 2 indicating “5” and the character # 1 corresponding to each number # 2 is specified as the pattern to be extracted.

  At this time, the identified symbols are virtually arranged in the vertical direction (step S613). Here, it is assumed that the horizontal direction is set to the x coordinate and the vertical direction is set to the y coordinate, the x coordinate increases from left to right, and the y coordinate increases from top to bottom.

  For example, the decorative pattern # 2 composed of the combination of the number # 2 indicating “6” and the character # 1 indicating “Elephant” is displayed at the reference position ZA shown in FIGS. In the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A, a display area starting from the xy coordinates (0, 150) defined as the “reference position” corresponding to “1 symbol (↓)” is provided. (Step S614). In the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A, a combination of values in which the size of the display area when the change direction is “1 pattern (↓)” is defined as “x” and “y” ( 150, 150). Therefore, an area surrounded by 150 (dots) in the x and y directions starting from the xy coordinates (0, 150) is the position of the display area on the arranged image.

  Thereafter, every time a predetermined time elapses, for example, every time the image display control process shown in FIG. 63 is executed, the decorative symbol variation speed (variation start) from the variation speed / direction data table T32 shown in FIG. , And the count value of the counter are sequentially read out and the display area y is read. The position of the display area on the arranged image is moved upward by subtracting the coordinate by a value corresponding to the fluctuation speed.

  The display control CPU 130 refers to the index data table T12 shown in FIG. 32 on the basis of the symbol number of the decorative symbol # 2 to be displayed, the index number of animation variation, and the like, thereby determining the address of the image data to be read from the CGROM 134. The drawing command and / or attribute data is transmitted to the VDP 133 (step S617). Based on the drawing command and / or attribute data from the display control CPU 130, the VDP 133 reads the image data of the number # 2 and the character # 1 included in the decorative design # 2 to be displayed from the CGROM 134, and stores them in the work area of the VRAM 135. An image that is synthesized and developed (step S651 in FIG. 65A) and clipped at the specified size and position of the display area is set to the first and The process of displaying on the corresponding one of the second image display devices 5A and 5B is repeated (step S653 in FIG. 65A and step S661 in FIG. 65B).

  Thus, when the display area is moved upward by 150 (dots) (the direction in which the y-coordinate value decreases), the number # 2 indicating “5”, the number # 2 indicating “4”, and each number # The decorative symbol # 2 composed of the combination with the character # 1 corresponding to 2 is specified as the symbol to be extracted. Thereafter, by performing the same processing, it is possible to perform scroll display in the downward direction by virtually arranging the symbols to be extracted and specifying the position of the display area and the address of the image data. Further, by repeating these operations for each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, and DR, scroll display of the decorative design # 2 can be performed.

  When the variation of the decorative symbol variably displayed in the variation pattern B1 is nearing the end, the data “with animation” is read from the entry in the seventh row in the variation speed / direction data table T32 shown in FIG. This is the timing of the start of animation fluctuation. For example, it is set so that the animation change start timing is displayed when the symbol immediately before the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed. At this time, the “variation direction” is “1 symbol (↓)”.

  The display control CPU 130 refers to the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A based on the fact that the “variation direction” is “1 symbol (↓)”, and thereby the number of decorative symbols to be extracted. Specify (2) for the number of extracted symbols. Further, in the same manner as described above, one of the combinations of the number # 2 and the character # 1 in the decorative design # 2 to be displayed is specified as the design to be extracted.

  For example, as a pattern to be extracted corresponding to the “left” variable display portion DL, a number # 2 indicating “4”, a number # 2 indicating “3”, and a character # 1 corresponding to each number # 2 When the decorative design # 2 consisting of the combination is specified, for example, as shown in FIG. 70, the design is arranged in the vertical direction. Also, in the horizontal direction, the animation variation index numbers are increased from “1” to “10”, and the same symbols (symbol numbers) with different display modes (the symbol orientation and viewpoint) are arranged. Are virtually arranged. A combination of a number # 2 indicating “5”, a number # 2 indicating “4”, and a character # 1 corresponding to each number # 2 as symbols to be extracted corresponding to the “right” variable display portion DR When the decorative symbol # 2 consisting of is specified, for example, as shown in FIG. 71, the symbols are arranged in the vertical direction, and the symbols having different display modes are arranged in the horizontal direction.

  After that, the scroll display and animation change in the downward direction, which is the first change direction, are executed while changing the display area range in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as time passes (count value update). To do. At this time, the position of the display area moves to areas XX1, XX2, and XX3 shown in FIG. 70 according to the elapsed time, and also moves to areas YY1, YY2, and YY3 shown in FIG. In this way, the position of the display area becomes the area XX3 shown in FIG. 70, so that in the “left” variable display portion DL, the number # 2 indicating “3” which is the fixed decoration symbol and the character # 1 indicating “horse” are displayed. The decorative pattern # 2 composed of the combination is displayed in the central portion of the “left” variable display portion DL which is the reference position ZA. In addition, since the position of the display area is the area YY3 shown in FIG. 71, in the “right” variable display section DR, the character # 1 indicating the number # 2 indicating “4” and the “cover” that is the determined decorative symbol. Decorative pattern # 2 consisting of the above combination is displayed in the central portion of the “right” variable display portion DR which is the reference position ZA.

  Subsequently, “1” indicating the scroll display in the upward direction as the second fluctuation direction from the entry in the eighth line or the ninth line in the fluctuation speed / direction data table T32 shown in FIG. The data of “design (↑)” and the data of “with animation” are read out. At this time, the position of the display area moves to areas XX4, XX5, and XX6 shown in FIG. 70 according to the elapsed time, and also moves to areas YY4, YY5, and YY6 shown in FIG. In this way, an upward scroll display is performed. Here, the position of the area XX6 shown in FIG. 70 is a decorative pattern composed of a combination of a number # 2 indicating “3” and a character # 1 indicating “horse” which are fixed decorative patterns in the “left” variable display portion DL. Corresponding to # 2, as shown in FIG. 17, it is set at a position moved upward by a difference ZB1-ZA from the reference position ZA based on a predetermined return amount “90”. In addition, the position of the area YY6 shown in FIG. 71 is a decorative pattern # consisting of a combination of the number # 2 indicating “4” and the character # 1 indicating “cover” in the “right” variable display portion DR. Corresponding to 2, as shown in FIG. 17, based on a predetermined return amount “70”, it is set at a position moved upward by a difference ZB <b> 2 -ZA from the reference position ZA.

  Furthermore, as time elapses, the entries in the 10th row and the 11th row in the fluctuation speed / direction data table T32 shown in FIG. Data of “1 symbol (↓)” indicating scroll display and data of “animation” are read out. At this time, the position of the display area moves to areas XX7, XX8, and XX9 shown in FIG. 70 according to the elapsed time, and also moves to areas YY7, YY8, and YY9 shown in FIG. Thus, the scroll display is performed in the downward direction. When the position of the display area reaches the area XX9 shown in FIG. 70 or the area YY9 shown in FIG. 71, the fixed decorative symbols are displayed at the reference position ZA in the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR. Will be displayed. Therefore, by stopping the variation of the decorative pattern # 2, the fixed decorative pattern can be derived and displayed.

  Next, an example of the image processing operation in the variation display state with the variation patterns C1 to C3 as shown in FIGS. When the decorative design is variably displayed in any of the variation patterns C1 to C3, the variation speed / direction data tables T331 to T333 shown in FIGS. 36 (A) to (C) are used.

  For example, corresponding to the variation pattern C1, any one of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, and DR in any of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. The displayed symbol is a decorative symbol # 3 composed of a combination of a sprite # 1 with a numbered ring indicating "4" to "6" and a sprite # 2 of the character # 2 corresponding to each sprite # 1. It shall be. In this case, it is considered that the position of the area CC1 shown in FIG. In this state, for example, in the fluctuation speed / direction data table T331, it is assumed that the fluctuation direction is designated as “standard (↓)” and “no animation” is designated.

  In this case, the variation display of the decorative pattern # 3 is roughly a combination of numbers indicated by the numbered ring as (4, 5, 6), (3,4, 5), (2, 3, 4),.・ ・ Sequentially changes. However, the display changes smoothly (continuously) instead of discretely.

  More specifically, the display control CPU 130 sets the display area when the change direction is “standard (↓)” by the entry in the first row in the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the number of decorative symbols to be extracted (the number of extracted symbols) is specified as “4” (step S621 in FIG. 64). Thereafter, one of the combination of the numbered ring and the character # 2 in the decorative design # 3 to be displayed is specified as the design to be extracted (step S622).

  Then, for example, when a decorative pattern # 3 consisting of a combination of a numbered ring indicating “3” to “6” and a corresponding character # 2 is specified as an extracted pattern, as shown in FIG. The symbols are virtually arranged in the vertical direction (step S623). In the arrangement shown in FIG. 72A, the horizontal direction is set to the x coordinate, and the x coordinate increases from left to right. In the arrangement shown in FIG. 72A, the vertical direction is set to the y-coordinate, and the y-coordinate increases from the top to the bottom.

  Subsequently, the display control CPU 130 starts the xy coordinates (0, 150) defined as the “reference position” corresponding to “standard (↓)” in the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. A display region surrounded by 150 (dots) in the x direction and 460 (dots) in the y direction is provided. Thereby, the location of area CC1 shown to FIG. 72 (B) is pinpointed as a position of a display area (step S624). Thereafter, the scroll display is performed in the downward direction while changing the range of the display area in the vertical direction as time elapses (count value is updated). At this time, the position of the display area moves to areas CC1, CC11, CC12, CC13, and CC2 shown in FIG. 72B according to the elapsed time.

  The display control CPU 130 specifies the address of the image data to be read from the CGROM 134 by referring to the index data table T13 shown in FIG. 33 based on the symbol number of the ornament symbol # 3 to be displayed (step S626). . At this time, if the data of “image A” is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T331 (step S627; No), no address is specified for the image data for ring effect. Then, a drawing command and / or attribute data is transmitted to the VDP 133 (step S629). Based on the drawing command and / or attribute data from the display control CPU 130, the VDP 133 reads the numbered ring and the image data of the character # 2 included in the decorative pattern # 3 to be displayed from the CGROM 134 and stores them in the work area of the VRAM 135. An image that is synthesized and developed (step S651 in FIG. 65A) and clipped at the size and position of the specified display area is first and every predetermined time (for example, 33 milliseconds) that is, for example, one frame time. The process of displaying on the corresponding one of the second image display devices 5A and 5B is repeated (step S653 in FIG. 65A and step S661 in FIG. 65B).

  Thus, when the display area moves upward by 150 (dots) (in the direction in which the y coordinate value decreases), it reaches an area CC2 shown in FIG. At this time, the decorative symbol # 3, which is a combination of the numbered rings indicating “2” to “5” and the corresponding character # 2, is specified as the symbol to be extracted. In the same process, the symbol to be extracted is virtually arranged, and the position of the display area and the address of the image data are specified, so that the “left” variable display portion DL is scrolled downward. It can be performed. Further, based on the data read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T332 shown in FIG. 36B or the fluctuation speed / direction data table T333 shown in FIG. By repeating these operations for DR and DC, scroll display of the decorative design # 3 can be performed.

  Thereafter, when the scroll display of the decorative symbol # 3 is finished in any one of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, and DR, the animation is stopped in the variable display portion. Display will be performed. For example, after the scroll display of the decorative symbol # 3 is finished in the “left” variable display portion DL in the variation pattern C1, the “variation direction” is changed to “3 symbols from the variation speed / direction data table T331 shown in FIG. It is assumed that data indicating “stop”, “animation present” data, and “image A” data are read (for example, one of the entries in the 13th and 14th lines corresponding to the variation pattern C1). .

  At this time, the display control CPU 130 corresponds to the display area when the change direction is “3 symbol stop” by the entry in the seventh line in the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. The number of decorative symbols to be extracted (the number of extracted symbols) is specified as “3”. Then, for example, when a decorative pattern # 3 consisting of a combination of a numbered ring indicating “4” to “6” and a corresponding character # 2 is specified as an extracted pattern, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), The symbols are virtually arranged in the vertical direction. Also, in the horizontal direction, the same symbols (symbol numbers) with different display modes are arranged virtually in the order in which the animation variation index numbers increase from “1” to “5”. .

  Thereafter, the animation display is executed to change the display mode of the same symbol (symbol number) by changing the range of the display area in the horizontal direction as time elapses (update of the count value). At this time, the position of the display area moves to D1, D2, D3, D4, and D5 shown in FIG. 73A according to the elapsed time.

  Further, for example, after the scroll display of the decorative symbol # 3 is finished on the “left” variable display portion DL in the variation pattern C2, the “variation direction” is changed from the variation speed / direction data table T331 shown in FIG. It is assumed that data indicating “1 symbol stop”, “animation present” data, and “image A” data are read (for example, the entry on the 14th row corresponding to the variation pattern C2).

  At this time, the display control CPU 130 corresponds to the display area when the change direction is “1 symbol stop” by the entry in the eighth row in the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. The number of decorative symbols to be extracted (the number of extracted symbols) is specified as “1”. Then, for example, when the design symbol # 3 consisting of the combination of the numbered ring indicating “7” and the corresponding character # 2 indicating “lion” is specified as the symbol to be extracted, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), Those in which the display modes are changed in the order in which the animation variation index number in the symbol increases from “1” to “5” are arranged virtually in the horizontal direction.

  Thereafter, the animation display is executed to change the display mode of the same symbol (symbol number) by changing the range of the display area in the horizontal direction as time elapses (update of the count value). At this time, the position of the display area moves to E1, E2, E3, E4, and E5 shown in FIG. 73B according to the elapsed time.

  By the same process, it is also possible to perform animation display of each decorative symbol # 3 during the variable display of decorative symbol # 3. For example, when the variation direction is “standard (↓)” and the data “with animation” and the data of “image A” are read, the display control CPU 130 displays the display shown in FIG. The number of decorative symbols (number of extracted symbols) to be extracted corresponding to the display region is specified as “4” by the entry in the first row in the region size data table T20. Then, for example, when a decorative pattern # 3 consisting of a combination of a numbered ring indicating "3" to "6" and a corresponding character # 2 is specified as an extracted pattern, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), The symbols are virtually arranged in the vertical direction. Also, in the horizontal direction, the same symbols (symbol numbers) with different display modes are arranged virtually in the order in which the animation variation index numbers increase from “1” to “5”. .

  Thereafter, the scroll display in the downward direction and the animation change are executed in parallel by changing the range of the display area in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as time passes (count value update). At this time, the position of the display area moves to areas F1, F2, F3, F4, and F5 shown in FIG. 74A according to the elapsed time.

  Further, for example, when the data of “with animation” and the data of “image A” are read when the change direction is “switching”, the display control CPU 130 displays the display area shown in FIG. The number of decorative symbols (number of extracted symbols) to be extracted corresponding to the display area is specified as “2” by the entry in the third row in the size data table T20. Then, for example, when a decorative design # 3 consisting of a combination of a numbered ring indicating “5” and “6” and a corresponding character # 2 is specified as an extracted design, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), The symbols are arranged virtually in the vertical direction. Also, in the horizontal direction, the same symbols (symbol numbers) with different display modes are arranged virtually in the order in which the animation variation index numbers increase from “1” to “5”. .

  Thereafter, the scroll display in the downward direction and the animation change are executed in parallel by changing the range of the display area in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as time passes (count value update). At this time, the position of the display area moves to areas G1, G2, G3, G4, and G5 shown in FIG. 74B according to the elapsed time.

  Further, when the decorative display # 3 is variably displayed in any of the variable patterns C1 to C3, when the variable display mode becomes reach, the decorative symbol variably displayed on the “medium” variable display portion DC. By combining the ring effect image with # 3 and displaying this ring effect image, it is possible to display an animation such as “explosion”, “smoke”, “flame”, “extinguishing”, for example. . As a specific example, after the same decorative design # 3 is stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR in the variation pattern C1, the variation display mode becomes reach, and then FIG. The data indicating that “change direction” is “standard (↓)”, “no animation” data, and “image C” data are read from the change speed / direction data table T333 shown in FIG. (For example, an entry on the eleventh row corresponding to the variation pattern C1).

  At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), decorative symbols # 3 specified as symbols to be extracted are virtually arranged in the vertical direction to specify the display position on the image and to perform clipping. The area is specified, the address of the image data of the decorative pattern # 3 to be read from the CGROM 134 is specified, and the data of “image C” is read (step S627; Yes). The address of the ring effect image data to be read from the CGROM 134 is specified based on the elapsed time from the start of the variable display, the display order of the ring effect image, and the like (step S628). Then, the display control CPU 130 sends a drawing command and / or attribute data to the VDP 133 to notify that there is a composition with the ring effect image.

  In the VDP 133, based on the drawing command from the display control CPU 130 and / or the attribute data, it is determined that there is a synthesis with the ring effect image (step S654 in FIG. 65A; Yes). Therefore, the VDP 133 reads the numbered ring and the image data of the character # 2 included in the decorative pattern # 3 to be displayed from the CGROM 134, combines them in the work area of the VRAM 135 and develops them, and then specifies the size of the specified display area. Further, a process for synthesizing a ring effect image is executed on the image clipped at the positions (step S655). Of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, a composite image of the image of decorative design # 3 and the ring effect image generated in this way is, for example, every predetermined time (for example, 33 milliseconds) that is one frame time. (Step S653 in FIG. 65A and step S661 in FIG. 65B), for example, “explosion”, “smoke” as shown in FIG. Animation display such as “flaming up” and “extinguishing fire” is executed.

  Further, by the same processing, while displaying the variation of the decorative symbol # 3 on the “middle” variable display unit DC, the animation of each decorative symbol # 3 is displayed, and an image for the ring effect is synthesized and this ring effect is displayed. It is also possible to perform animation display in parallel by switching and displaying images for use. As a specific example, after the same decorative design # 3 is stopped and displayed on the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR in the variation pattern C3 and the variation display mode becomes reach, FIG. The data in which the “variation direction” indicates “standard (↓)”, the data “with animation”, and the data of “image D” are read from the variation speed / direction data table T333 shown in FIG. (For example, an entry on the 11th row corresponding to the variation pattern C3).

  At this time, four decorative symbols # 3 identified as symbols to be extracted are arranged virtually in the vertical direction, and the same symbols (symbol numbers) with different display modes are arranged in the horizontal direction. Be placed. Then, the display position on the image, the area to be clipped, the address of the image data of the decorative design # 3 to be read out from the CGROM 134, and the data of “Image D” are read out. Based on this, the address of the ring effect image data to be read from the CGROM 134 is specified. Thereafter, the display control CPU 130 sends a drawing command and / or attribute data to the VDP 133 to notify that there is a composition with the ring effect image.

  In the VDP 133, based on the drawing command and / or attribute data from the display control CPU 130, the numbered ring included in the decorative pattern # 3 to be displayed and the image data of the character # 3 are read from the CGROM 134 and the work area of the VRAM 135 is read. Then, the image is clipped with the size and position of the specified display area. Subsequently, when it is determined that there is a synthesis with the ring effect image, a process for further synthesizing the ring effect image is executed on the clipped image. Of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, a composite image of the image of decorative design # 3 and the ring effect image generated in this way is, for example, every predetermined time (for example, 33 milliseconds) that is one frame time. By repeating the process of displaying on the corresponding item, the animation change of the decorative pattern # 3 and the animation display such as “explosion”, “smoke”, “flame”, “extinguish” as shown in FIG. Are executed in parallel.

  75A to 75C are timing charts showing an example of the display operation when the decorative symbol # 1 is variably displayed with the variation patterns A1 to A3. In the following, the decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, and DR are respectively referred to as “left symbol”, “middle symbol”, and “right symbol”. "

  In the example of the display operation with the variation pattern A1 shown in FIG. 75A, the variation display of the decorative symbol # 1 is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, and DR. Then, scroll display is performed downward in each variable display unit. At this time, the fluctuation speed and the fluctuation direction specified by the fluctuation speed / direction data table T31 shown in FIG. 9 ”(vertical direction shown in FIG. 31), the arrangement information of the decorative design # 1 to be displayed is specified based on the arrangement of the decorative design # 1 specified. Then, based on the specified array information and the index numbers “1” to “5” (horizontal direction shown in FIG. 31) of the animation variation in the index data table T11, the display area size data shown in FIG. The image data of the decorative design # 1 to be displayed is specified in the display area having the size specified by the table T20.

  The VDP 133 reads out the image data of the decorative pattern # 1 specified in this way from the CGROM 134, and displays the image data by, for example, clipping the image data developed on the VRAM 135 based on the read image data and the size of the display area. Generate an image. Then, for example, by repeating the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B every predetermined time which is one frame time, the animation variation is displayed together with the scroll display of the decorative pattern # 1. It can be carried out.

  In the fluctuation pattern A1, based on the fluctuation speed specified by the fluctuation speed / direction data table T31, the moving speed of the decorative design # 1 in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, DR fl (t), fc (t), fr (t) are determined. Further, by referring to the display area size data table T20 based on the fact that the data of “standard” (↓) is read from the variable speed / direction data table T31, “left”, “middle” The size of the display area in each of the “right” variable display portions DL, DC, and DR is such a size that three decorative symbols # 1 can be displayed. Further, the enlargement / reduction ratio of the image data is “1”, and the transparency is “0”.

  Thereafter, in the variation pattern A1, the left symbol and the right symbol are sequentially stopped, so that the variation display mode of the decorative symbol # 1 becomes reach. Finally, when the middle symbol stops, the big hit or the loss is finally determined.

  In the example of the display operation with the variation pattern A2 shown in FIG. 75B, the size of the display area in each of the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR is large enough to display three decorative symbols # 1. On the other hand, the size of the display area in the “middle” variable display portion DC is a size capable of displaying one decoration symbol # 1. Similarly to the variable speed / direction data table T31, based on the variable speed and variable direction specified by the data table stored in the ROM 131, the decorative symbols # on the left and right variable display portions DL and DR are displayed. 1 moving speeds fl (t), fr (t) are determined, and scroll display is performed in the downward direction. The enlargement / reduction ratio of the image data is “1”, and the transparency is “0”.

  In contrast, in the “middle” variable display portion DC, two decorative symbols # 1 are displayed in an overlapping manner, and the decorative symbol # 1 is switched and displayed by changing the transparency of each symbol. At this time, the scroll display in the downward direction may be performed in a state where the two decorative symbols # 1 are overlapped, or the decorative symbol # 1 is switched and displayed at a certain place without performing the scroll display. It may be. That is, in the “middle” variable display portion DC, the transparency of the decorative design # 1 is represented by the time function φ (t), and as shown in FIG. 66, the transparency of the decorative design # 1 displayed earlier is displayed. While gradually increasing, the transparency of the decorative pattern # 1 to be displayed later gradually decreases. The enlargement / reduction ratio of the image data is “1”.

  Thereafter, in the variation pattern A2, the left symbol and the right symbol are sequentially stopped, so that the variation display mode of the decorative symbol # 1 becomes reach. Finally, when the middle symbol stops, the big hit or the loss is finally determined.

  In the example of the display operation in the variation pattern A3 shown in FIG. 75C, the size of the display area in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, DR is the decorative pattern # 1. It is a size that can display three. Similarly to the variable speed / direction data table T31, based on the variable speed and variable direction specified by the data table stored in the ROM 131, the variable display portions DL, DC of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. , The moving speeds fl (t), fc (t), fr (c) of the decorative pattern # 1 in DR are determined, and the scroll display is performed in the downward direction. At this time, the enlargement / reduction ratio of the image data is “1”, and the transparency is “0”.

  Thereafter, in the variation pattern A3, the left symbol and the right symbol are sequentially stopped, so that the variation display mode of the decorative symbol # 1 becomes reach. At this time, the range of the display area in the “middle” variable display portion DC is the size and position for performing the horizontal scroll display as shown in AF1 to AF5 shown in FIG. 69 or FIG. Is a size that can display about 6.5 decorative symbols # 1 in the horizontal direction. Further, the moving speed fc (t) of the decorative symbol # 1 is determined based on the fluctuation speed and the fluctuation direction designated by the data table stored in the ROM 131, and scroll display in the left direction is performed. Further, the enlargement / reduction ratio of the image data is “0.8”, and as shown in FIG. 67, the transparency of the decorative pattern # 1 is changed according to the position in the display area. Finally, when the middle symbol stops, the big hit or the loss is finally determined.

  FIG. 76 is a timing diagram showing an example of a display operation when the decorative symbol # 2 is variably displayed in the variation pattern B1. In the display operation example of the variation pattern B1 shown in FIG. 76, when the variation display of the decorative symbol # 2 is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, DR, In the variable display section, scroll display is performed in the downward direction, which is the first fluctuation direction. At this time, the symbol numbers “0” to “9” of the decorative symbols in the variable velocity and direction specified by the variable velocity / direction data table T32 shown in FIG. 35B and the index data table T12 shown in FIG. Based on the arrangement of the decorative design # 2 specified corresponding to (number # 2 and the vertical direction of the character # 1 shown in FIG. 32), the arrangement information of the decorative design # 2 to be displayed is specified. At this time, since “no animation” data is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T32, the display of the size specified by the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. Image data of decorative design # 2 to be displayed in the region is specified.

  The VDP 133 reads the image data of the decorative pattern # 2 specified in this way from the CGROM 134 and displays the image data by, for example, clipping the image data developed on the VRAM 135 based on the read image data and the size of the display area. Generate an image. Then, for example, by repeating the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B every predetermined time which is one frame time, scroll display of the decorative design # 2 can be performed. .

  In the variation pattern B1, based on the variation direction designated by the variation speed / direction data table T32, the moving speed of the decorative pattern # 2 in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, DR Is determined. Further, by referring to the display area size data table T20 based on the fact that the data whose “change direction” is “1 symbol (↓)” is read from the change speed / direction data table T32, “left”, “ The size of the display area in each of the “middle” and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, and DR is such that one decoration symbol # 2 can be displayed.

  Thereafter, an operation for stopping the variable display of the left symbol is performed. At this time, the left symbol, which is the final symbol in the ornament symbol # 2, is decelerated and temporarily stopped at the reference position ZA. Then, FIG. 17 shows data corresponding to the “change direction” read from the change speed / direction data table T32 shown in FIG. Thus, based on the return position data that specifies the return amount prepared in advance, scroll display is performed in the upward direction, which is the second fluctuation direction. Following this, the final stop position, such as data with “change direction” read from the change speed / direction data table T32 of “1 pattern (↓)” and difference data indicating the difference between the reference position ZA and the return position, for example. On the basis of the stop position data that can identify the reference position ZA, the scroll display is performed in the downward direction as the first fluctuation direction.

  After stopping the left symbol variation display in this manner, an operation for stopping the right symbol variation display is performed. At this time, the right symbol, which is the final symbol in the ornament symbol # 2, is decelerated and temporarily stopped at the reference position ZA. Then, based on the data whose “change direction” is “1 symbol (↑)” and the return position data corresponding to the right symbol which is the confirmed decorative symbol, scroll display is performed in the upward direction which is the second change direction. . Following this, based on the data whose “change direction” is “1 symbol (↓)” and the stop position data that can specify the reference position ZA as the final stop position, the first change direction is changed downward. Scroll display is performed.

  In addition, when stopping the change display of the middle symbol, the middle symbol that becomes the fixed decoration symbol is temporarily stopped at the reference position ZA and then scrolled upward in the second change direction. Subsequently, scroll display in the downward direction, which is the first fluctuation direction, is performed until the right symbol, which is the confirmed decorative symbol, moves to the reference position ZA, which is the final stop position. Thus, the middle symbol is finally stopped, so that the big hit or the loss is finally determined.

  77A to 77C are timing charts showing an example of a display operation when the decorative design # 3 is variably displayed with the variation patterns C1 to C3. In the example of the display operation with the variation patterns C1 to C3 shown in FIGS. 77 (A) to (C), the decorative pattern # 3 is displayed on the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. When the variable display is started, scroll display is performed in the downward direction in each variable display unit. At this time, the display area is based on the fact that the data whose “change direction” is “standard (↓)” is read from the change speed / direction data tables T331 to T333 shown in FIGS. By referring to the size data table T20, the size of the display area in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, DR can be displayed for three decorative symbols # 3. It is a big size.

  In the “left” variable display portion DL, the fluctuation speed and direction specified by the fluctuation speed / direction data table T331 shown in FIG. 36A and the decoration symbol # 3 in the index data table T13 shown in FIG. Based on the arrangement of decorative symbols # 3 specified corresponding to the symbol numbers “0” to “9” (numbered ring shown in FIG. 34 and the vertical direction of characters # 2 and # 3), the display target is displayed. The arrangement information of decorative design # 3 is specified.

  At this time, since “no animation” data is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T331, the display of the size specified by the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. The image data of decorative design # 3 to be displayed in the region is specified. Further, since the data of “image A” is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T331, the image data for ring effect is not used and is not specified. The VDP 133 reads the image data of the decorative pattern # 3 specified in this way from the CGROM 134, and displays the image data by, for example, clipping the image data developed on the VRAM 135 based on the read image data and the size of the display area. Generate an image. Then, for example, by repeating the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B every predetermined time which is one frame time, the decorative symbol is displayed on the “left” variable display portion DL. The scroll display of # 3 can be performed.

  In the “right” variable display section DR, the display target is displayed in the same manner as the “left” variable display section DL from the fluctuation speed and direction specified by the fluctuation speed / direction data table T332 shown in FIG. The arrangement information of the decorative design # 3 is specified, and the image data of the decorative design # 3 to be displayed is specified based on the specified arrangement information. The image data of the decorative design # 3 specified in this way is read out by the VDP 133, and an image to be displayed is generated. Then, by repeating the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, scroll display of the decorative pattern # 3 can be performed on the “right” variable display portion DR. .

  In the “middle” variable display portion DC, the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR are determined based on the variation speed and direction specified by the variation speed / direction data table T333 shown in FIG. Similarly, the arrangement information of the decorative design # 3 to be displayed is specified, and the image data of the decorative design # 3 to be displayed is specified based on the specified arrangement information. The image data of the decorative design # 3 specified in this way is read out by the VDP 133, and an image to be displayed is generated. Then, by repeating the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, scroll display of the decorative symbol # 3 can be performed on the “medium” variable display unit DC. .

  Subsequently, in the display operation example of the variation pattern C1 shown in FIG. 77A, the variation display of the left symbol is stopped. At this time, the size of the display area in the “left” variable display portion DL is such that three decorative symbols # 3 can be displayed. Further, since “animation present” data is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T331, the array information corresponding to the “left” variable display portion DL and the animation fluctuation index number “1” in the index data table T13. To “5” (the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 33), the decorative pattern # 3 to be displayed in the display area of the size specified by the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. Image data is identified. By repeatedly executing the process of displaying the image data specified in this way, the animation display on the left symbol that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is not performed. After this, the variation display mode of the decorative design # 3 becomes reach by stopping the variation display of the right design. Then, since “animation present” data is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 and T332, the arrangement information corresponding to the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR, and the index data table T13 Based on the animation variation index numbers “1” to “5” (horizontal direction shown in FIG. 33), the display area of the size specified by the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. Image data of decorative design # 3 to be displayed is specified. At this time, by reading the data of “image A” from the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 and T332, as the decorative design # 3 to be displayed, the design image data consisting of a combination of a numbered ring and the character # 2 Is identified.

  The image data of the decorative design # 3 specified in this way is read out by the VDP 133, and an image to be displayed is generated. Then, the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B is repeated. As a result, it is possible to perform an animation display of the decorative design # 3 whose fluctuation has stopped in the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR.

  Thereafter, since the data of “Image C” is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T333 shown in FIG. 36C, the image of the decorative design # 3 and the ring effect image are displayed on the “medium” variable display portion DC. Display the combined image. At this time, the image change and the change order for the ring effect are specified by the index numbers “1” to “5” (horizontal direction shown in FIG. 33) of the animation variation in the index data table T13. Based on the image change thus specified and the order of change, ring effect image data to be combined with the decorative pattern # 3 to be displayed is specified.

  The VDP 133 reads out the image data of the specified decorative design # 3 from the CGROM 134, reads out from the CGROM 134 the image data for ring effect specified to be combined with the decorative design # 3, and synthesizes the read image data. Image to be displayed. Then, the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B is repeated. As a result, a ring effect image is combined with the decorative pattern # 3 that is variably displayed on the “middle” variable display unit DC, for example, “explosion”, “smoke”, “flame”, “ The animation display that changes in order such as “extinguishing fire” can be executed in parallel with the scroll display.

  For example, after the ring effect image is “extinguished”, the “middle” variable display portion DC is displayed on the “middle” variable display unit DC based on the reading of the data of “image A” from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T333. Then, the synthesis of the ring effect image for the decorative design # 3 that is displayed in a variable manner is terminated. Even after the change of the middle symbol is stopped, until the predetermined time elapses, “left”, “middle” is read based on the fact that the data “with animation” is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 to T333. ”And“ Right ”variable display portions DL, DC, and DR, the decorative symbol # 3 is displayed as an animation.

  Also, when the left symbol variation display stops in the variation pattern C2 display operation example shown in FIG. 77 (B), the size of the display area in the “left” variable display portion DL is one decoration symbol # 3. The size is displayable. Further, since “animation present” data is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T331, the array information corresponding to the “left” variable display portion DL and the animation fluctuation index number “1” in the index data table T13. To “5” (the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 33), the decorative pattern # 3 to be displayed in the display area of the size specified by the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. Image data is identified. By repeatedly executing the process of displaying the image data specified in this way, the animation display on the left symbol that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is not performed. After this, the variation display mode of the decorative design # 3 becomes reach by stopping the variation display of the right design. Then, since “animation present” data is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 and T332, the arrangement information corresponding to the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR, and the index data table T13 Based on the animation variation index numbers “1” to “5” (horizontal direction shown in FIG. 33), the display area of the size specified by the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. Image data of decorative design # 3 to be displayed is specified. At this time, by reading the data of “image B” from the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 and T332, as the decorative design # 3 to be displayed, the design image data consisting of a combination of a numbered ring and the character # 3 Is identified.

  The image data of the decorative design # 3 specified in this way is read out by the VDP 133, and an image to be displayed is generated. Then, the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B is repeated. As a result, it is possible to perform an animation display of the decorative design # 3 whose fluctuation has stopped in the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR.

  Thereafter, since the data of “Image C” is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T333 shown in FIG. 36C, the image of the decorative design # 3 and the ring effect image are displayed on the “medium” variable display portion DC. Display the combined image. At this time, since “no animation” data is read out, the animation display of the decorative pattern # 3 itself is not performed. Further, as the decorative design # 3 to be displayed, design image data consisting of a combination of a numbered ring and the character # 2 is specified. Thus, for example, “explosion”, “smoke”, “flame”, “extinguishing” are combined with the decorative design # 3 that is variably displayed on the “middle” variable display unit DC. The animation display that changes in order can be executed in parallel with the scroll display.

  For example, after the ring effect image is “extinguished”, the “middle” variable display portion DC is displayed on the “middle” variable display unit DC based on the reading of the data of “image A” from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T333. Then, the synthesis of the ring effect image for the decorative design # 3 that is displayed in a variable manner is terminated. Even after the change of the middle symbol is stopped, until the predetermined time elapses, “left”, “middle” is read based on the fact that the data “with animation” is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 to T333. ”And“ Right ”variable display portions DL, DC, and DR, the decorative symbol # 3 is displayed as an animation.

  Furthermore, when the left symbol variation display stops in the variation pattern C3 display operation example shown in FIG. 77 (C), the size of the display area in the “left” variable display portion DL is three decorative symbols # 3. The size is displayable. Further, since “animation present” data is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T331, the array information corresponding to the “left” variable display portion DL and the animation fluctuation index number “1” in the index data table T13. To “5” (horizontal direction shown in FIG. 32), decorative pattern # 3 to be displayed in the display area of the size specified by the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. Image data is identified. By repeatedly executing the process of displaying the image data specified in this way, the animation display on the left symbol that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is not performed. Thereafter, immediately before the change display of the right symbol is stopped, the data of “with animation” is read from the change speed / direction data table T333, so that the arrangement information corresponding to the “medium” variable display unit DC, The size specified by the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A based on the animation change index numbers “1” to “5” (horizontal direction shown in FIG. 33) in the index data table T13. Image data of decorative design # 3 to be displayed is specified in the display area. At this time, since the data of “image B” is read out from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T333, the image data of the symbol composed of the combination of the numbered ring and the character # 3 is specified as the decorative symbol # 3 to be displayed. Is done. The image data of the decorative design # 3 specified in this way is read out by the VDP 133, and an image to be displayed is generated. Then, the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B is repeated. Thereby, the animation display of the decorative pattern # 3 can be executed in parallel with the scroll display on the “middle” variable display unit DC.

  Subsequently, in the variation pattern C3, when the variation display of the right symbol is stopped, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol # 3 becomes reach. Then, since “animation present” data is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 and T332, the arrangement information corresponding to the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR, and the index data table T13 Based on the animation variation index numbers “1” to “5” (horizontal direction shown in FIG. 33), the display area of the size specified by the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. Image data of decorative design # 3 to be displayed is specified. At this time, by reading the data of “image B” from the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 and T332, as the decorative design # 3 to be displayed, the design image data consisting of a combination of a numbered ring and the character # 3 Is identified.

  The image data of the decorative design # 3 specified in this way is read out by the VDP 133, and an image to be displayed is generated. Then, the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B is repeated. As a result, it is possible to perform an animation display of the decorative design # 3 whose fluctuation has stopped in the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR.

  After that, since the data of “image D” is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T333, the image of the image of the decorative design # 3 and the image for ring effect is synthesized in the “middle” variable display unit DC. Display. At this time, since the data “with animation” is read, the animation of the decorative pattern # 3 itself is also displayed. That is, based on the array information corresponding to the “middle” variable display portion DC and the animation change index numbers “1” to “5” (the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 33) in the index data table T13, FIG. The image data of the decorative design # 3 to be displayed is specified in the display area having the size specified by the display area size data table T20 shown in A).

  Further, as the decorative design # 3 to be displayed, design image data consisting of a combination of a numbered ring and a character # 3 is specified. The ring design image is further combined with the decorative pattern # 3 in which the scroll display and the animation display are performed in the “middle” variable display unit DC in this way, for example, “explosion”, “smoke”, “ An animation display that changes in order such as “flaming up” and “extinguishing fire” can be executed.

  For example, after the ring effect image becomes “fire extinguishing”, the data “image B” is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T333, and the “medium” variable display portion DC is displayed. Then, the synthesis of the ring effect image for the decorative design # 3 that is displayed in a variable manner is terminated. Even after the change of the middle symbol is stopped, until the predetermined time elapses, “left”, “middle” is read based on the fact that the data “with animation” is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 to T333. ”And“ Right ”variable display portions DL, DC, and DR, the decorative symbol # 3 is displayed as an animation.

  Hereinafter, a specific operation example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described focusing on display operations in the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B and the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. FIG. 78 (A) is a timing diagram showing an example of display operation in the first special symbol display device 4A, and FIG. 78 (B) is a timing diagram showing an example of display operation in the second special symbol display device 4B. FIG. 78C shows the timing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters the big hit gaming state. FIG. 79 shows an example of a specific display mode on the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B in the display operation example shown in FIG.

  In the example of the display operation shown in FIG. 78, in response to the establishment of the special game start condition (first start condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A at the timing T0, the special prize holding storage unit 121 starts the winning prize. The random number MR1 for jackpot determination associated with the data “first” is read (step S227 in FIG. 40), and the jackpot / probability determination processing (step S229) is executed based on the random number MR1. It has been determined that it is a big hit (step S325 in FIG. 41; Yes). As a result, the first big hit flag is set to the on state (step S326).

  At this time, in the display operation example shown in FIG. 78, the number of reserved storages in the special figure storage unit 121 is equal to or greater than the continuous effect execution allowable value (step S245 in FIG. 42; Yes), and the continuous effect is executed. The determination is made, the value of the effect mode flag is updated to “1”, and the initial count value “1” is set in the effect number counter (step S246). Then, the variation pattern D (big hit) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in this special figure game (step S247). Thereafter, the first variation display start command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the display control substrate 12 (step S264), and the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started ( Step S267). In this way, in response to the transmission of the first variation display start command from the main board 11 at the timing T0, the first image display device 5A displays the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. Accelerated display is started, and decorative symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 79 (C) is started (S151 and S152 in FIG. 59).

  Thereafter, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is established at the timing T1 (step S271; No, step S272; No in FIG. 44), the special symbol storage unit The jackpot determination random number MR1 associated with the start winning data “second” is read from 121 (step S282 in FIG. 45), and the jackpot / probability change determination process is executed based on the random value MR1 (step S282). Step S284). For example, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), after the decorative design # 1 is variably displayed in the variation pattern A2 (reach lose) on the second image display device 5B, the fixed decorative design is displayed as shown in FIG. 79 (D). Is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol display device 4B also ends the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game, thereby satisfying the second start condition for starting the next special symbol game.

  When it is determined that the game is lost in the big hit / probability change determination process based on the random value MR1, the second big hit flag remains off.

  Subsequently, when determining the variation pattern used in this special figure game, the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S297 in FIG. 46; No), and the count value of the effect counter is “1”. ”And different from the number of continuous performances (“ 4 ”in this embodiment) (step S307 in FIG. 47; No). Since the count value of the effect counter is “1” (step S401 in FIG. 48; Yes) and the second big hit flag is off (step S402; No), the decorative pattern by the second image display device 5B is displayed. It is determined whether or not the variable display mode is reach (step S405).

  In the display operation example shown in FIG. 78, when it is determined in step S405 that the reach is not performed (step S405; No), the value of the effect pattern flag is set to “3” (step S408). As a variation pattern used in the special figure game this time, the variation pattern α1 (normal loss) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined (step S409). At this time, the count value of the production counter is incremented by 1 to “2” (step S410). Thereafter, the second variation display start command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the display control substrate 12 (step S310 in FIG. 47), and the variation display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. (Step S313). Thus, based on the second variation display start command transmitted from the main board 11 at the timing T2, the second image display device 5B accelerates and displays the decorative symbols that have been stopped as shown in FIG. When the decorative symbol variation display is started in accordance with the variation pattern α1 (normally lost), the effect display as shown in FIG. 79 (F) is performed and the notification information 60a is displayed. At this time, in the first image display device 5A, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), the decorative symbol variation display is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, the second variation time timer provided on the main board 11 times out at the timing T3 when the special symbol variation display time Ti40 in the variation pattern α1 (normal loss) has elapsed from the timing T2 shown in FIG. At this time, the second variation display end command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the display control substrate 12, and the second variation display device 4B stops and displays a lost symbol different from the big hit symbol as a confirmed symbol ( Fluctuation stop process executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is “3”). Based on the second variation display end command transmitted from the main board 11 in this way, in the second image display device 5B, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), a combination of decorative symbols that are normally lost is derived and displayed. At this time, in the first image display device 5A, for example, as shown in FIG. 79 (G), the decorative pattern indicating “7” is stopped and displayed on the left variable display portion DL (temporary stop display), and other variable displays are displayed. In the parts DC and DR, the decorative pattern variation display is continuously performed.

  Subsequently, when the condition for starting the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is established at the timing T4, the value of the production mode flag is “1” (step S297 in FIG. 46; No), and the production number counter (Step S307 in FIG. 47; No, step S401 in FIG. 48; No, step S411 in FIG. 49; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second big hit flag is on. Determination is made (step S412). When the second big hit flag is off (step S412; No), since the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S417; Yes), the variation pattern used in this special figure game is as follows: The variation pattern α2 (normal loss) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined (step S418). At this time, the count value of the effect counter is incremented by 1 to “3” (step S410 in FIG. 48).

  Thus, when the variation display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started at the timing T4 (step S313 in FIG. 47), the second variation symbol display start command transmitted from the main board 11 is used to set the second variation symbol display device 4B. In the image display device 5B, the decorative symbol variation display is started in accordance with the variation pattern α2 (normally lost). Thereby, the effect display as shown in FIG. 79 (J) is performed and the notification information 60b is displayed. At this time, in the first image display device 5A, as shown in FIG. 79 (I), the decorative symbol variation display is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, the second variation display end command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the display control substrate 12 at the timing T5 when the variation display time Ti41 of the special symbol in the variation pattern α2 (normal loss) has elapsed from the timing T4 shown in FIG. Is done. In addition, in the second special symbol display device 4B, a lost symbol different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol. Based on the second variation display end command transmitted from the main board 11 in this way, in the second image display device 5B, as shown in FIG. 79 (L), a combination of decorative symbols that are normally lost is derived and displayed. At this time, in the first image display device 5A, as shown in FIG. 79 (K), the decorative symbol variation display is continuously performed.

  Subsequently, when the condition for starting the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is established at the timing T6, the value of the production mode flag is “1” (step S297 in FIG. 46; No), and the production number counter (Step 307 in FIG. 47; No, step S401 in FIG. 48; No, step S411 in FIG. 49; No), it is determined whether or not the second big hit flag is on. Determination is made (step S420 in FIG. 50). At this time, if it is determined that the second big hit flag is on (step S420; Yes), the value of the effect mode flag is “1” (step S421; Yes), so the effect mode flag Is updated to “2” (step S422), the variation pattern α3 (big hit) shown in FIG. 14 is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in this special figure game (step S423). At this time, the count value of the effect counter is incremented by 1 to “4” (step S410 in FIG. 48).

  Thus, when the variation display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started at the timing T6 (step S313 in FIG. 47), the second variation symbol display start command transmitted from the main board 11 is used to execute the second variation display start command. In the image display device 5B, the decorative pattern variation display is started in accordance with the variation pattern α3 (big hit). Thereby, the effect display as shown in FIG. 79 (N) is performed and the notification information 60c is displayed. At this time, in the first image display device 5A, as shown in FIG. 79 (M), the decorative symbol indicating “7” is stopped (temporarily stopped) on the variable display portion DR on the right, and the variable display portion in the middle is displayed. In DC, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol becomes reach by continuously performing the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, in the second image display device 5B, in accordance with the variation pattern α3 (big hit), as shown in FIG. 79 (P), the decorative symbols indicating “C” are stopped and displayed on the left and right variable display portions DL and DR. By performing (temporary stop display), the decorative display variation display mode becomes reach. Then, at the timing T7 when the special symbol variation display time Ti102 in the variation pattern α3 (big hit) has elapsed from the timing T6 shown in FIG. 78, the second variation display end command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the display control substrate 12. The Further, in the second special symbol display device 4B, the big hit symbol (special symbol indicating “7”) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol. Thus, based on the second variation display end command transmitted from the main board 11 at the timing T7, the second image display device 5B sets “C” to the variable display portion DC in the middle as shown in FIG. 79 (R). By stopping and displaying the decorative symbol to be shown, a combination of decorative symbols that are a big hit is derived and displayed. During this time, in the first image display device 5A, as shown in FIGS. 79 (O) and (Q), the decorative symbol variation display is continuously performed.

  At timing T7, the second special symbol display device 4B stops and displays the big hit symbol, and the second image display device 5B displays and displays the combination of the decorative symbols as the big hit combination, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 It becomes a big hit gaming state. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 78, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the big hit gaming state during the period from the timing T7 to the timing T8. During this period, the progress of the special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the progress of the decorative symbol variable display by the first image display device 5A may be stopped (interrupted). As a result, the jackpot game state is determined when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the jackpot symbol is confirmed by the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. It is possible to prevent competition with the big hit gaming state due to the stop display as a symbol. Here, when the big hit gaming state due to the opening / closing operation in the first and second special variable winning ball devices 7A and 7B occurs at the same time, either one of the first and second special variable winning ball devices 7A and 7B is won. If a game ball that should fall and be discharged without playing a game is awarded to the other winning ball device, a lot of prize balls may be paid out in a short time. On the other hand, the big hit game state by the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the big hit symbol by the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. By not competing with the jackpot gaming state due to being displayed as a fixed symbol, the jackpot gaming state due to the simultaneous opening and closing operation of both the first and second special variable winning ball devices 7A, 7B does not occur, It is possible to prevent the gambling performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being remarkably enhanced, and to prevent the player from becoming extremely advantageous.

  After the big hit gaming state ends at timing T8, when the start condition of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied at timing T9, the value of the effect mode flag is “2” (FIG. 46). Since the count value of the production counter is “4” (step S307; Yes in FIG. 47), it is determined whether or not the second big hit flag is on (FIG. 51). Step S441). When the second big hit flag is off (step S441; No), it is determined whether or not the first big hit flag is on (step S443). In the display operation example shown in FIG. 78, since it is determined that the variation display result of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is a big hit, the first big hit flag is on (step S443; Yes). Furthermore, when the special figure game by the second special symbol display device is started at the timing T2, the effect pattern flag is set to “3” (step S446; No), the timer in the first variable display time timer 122A The value is compared with the timer initial value corresponding to the variation display times Ti63 to Ti65 of the special symbols in the variation patterns δ1 (reach loss) to δ3 (reach loss) (step S531 in FIG. 54).

  In this way, the remaining variation display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the variation display time Ti65 of the special symbol in the variation pattern δ3 (reach lose) (Step S532; No), and When the variation display time Ti64 of the special symbol in the variation pattern δ2 (reach lose) is longer (step S534; Yes), the variation pattern δ2 (reach lose) is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in this special diagram game. (Step S535). At this time, the values of the effect mode flag and the effect pattern flag are both updated to “0” (step S451 in FIG. 51), and the count value of the effect number counter is initialized to “0” ( In step S452), a setting is made to end the rendering operation during the execution of a plurality of special figure games by the second special symbol display device 4B.

  When the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B is started at the timing T9 (step S313 in FIG. 47), the second image is based on the second variation display start command transmitted from the main board 11. In the display device 5B, the decorative symbol variation display is started in accordance with the variation pattern δ2 (reach loss). As a result, as shown in FIG. 79 (T), the second effect is different from the effect display by characters such as the notification information 60a to 60c shown in FIGS. 79 (F), (J), and (N). An effect display by a predetermined image (still image or moving image) displayed on the image display device 5B is performed. At this time, in the first image display device 5A, as shown in FIG. 79 (S), the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, in the second image display device 5B, according to the variation pattern δ2 (reach loss), as shown in FIG. 79 (V), the decorative symbols indicating “G” are stopped and displayed on the left and right variable display portions DL and DR. By performing (temporary stop display), the decorative display variation display mode becomes reach. Then, at time T10 when the special symbol variation display time Ti64 in the variation pattern δ2 (reach loss) has elapsed from timing T9 shown in FIG. 78, the second variation display end command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the display control substrate 12. The Further, in the second special symbol display device 4B, a lost symbol different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Thus, based on the second variation display end command transmitted from the main board 11 at the timing T10, in the second image display device 5B, for example, as shown in FIG. By stopping and displaying the decorative symbols to be displayed, a combination of decorative symbols that will cause reach loss is derived and displayed. At this time, in the first image display device 5A, as shown in FIG. 79 (W), the decorative symbol variation display is continuously performed.

  Thus, among the four special symbol games of the four special symbol games by the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variation display mode in the second image display device 5B becomes reach, and the effect display informed in advance Has been done. Thereafter, the first variation time timer provided on the main board 11 times out at the timing T11 when the variation display time Ti88 of the special symbol in the variation pattern D (big hit) has elapsed from the timing T1 shown in FIG. The progress of the special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the progress of the decorative symbol variation display by the first image display device 5A are stopped during the period from timing T7 to timing T8 when the big hit gaming state is reached ( In the case of interruption), when the time excluding this period becomes equal to the fluctuation display time Ti88 from the elapsed time from the timing T1, the first fluctuation time timer times out.

  When the first variation time timer times out, a first variation display end command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the display control substrate 12 (variation stop processing executed in step S113 in FIG. 39). Further, in the first special symbol display device 4A, the jackpot symbol (special symbol indicating “7”) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol. Thus, based on the first change display end command transmitted from the main board 11 at the timing T11, in the first image display device 5A, as shown in FIG. By stopping and displaying the decorative symbols, the combination of the decorative symbols that will be a big hit is derived and displayed. At this time, the special symbol variation display is performed on the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the second image display device 5B as shown in FIG. 79 (Z). When the second special symbol display device 4B is in progress, the progress of the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B and the progress of the decorative symbol variation display by the second image display device 5B may be stopped (interrupted). As a result, the jackpot game state is displayed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, and the jackpot symbol is confirmed by the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. It is possible to prevent competition with the big hit gaming state due to the stop display as a symbol.

  As described above, according to the present invention, when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the continuous effect is the first effect. It is determined that a predetermined effect display is to be performed, and the display operation in the second image display device 5B is performed, for example, in FIGS. Any of the notification information 60a to 60d using characters as shown in (D) is displayed according to the number of times the special symbol game is executed by the second special symbol display device 4B since the start of the continuous performance. If it is determined that the variation display result is a big hit in the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B before the end of the continuous effect, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure game. After the jackpot gaming state by being ended, during the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B, the second effect of the effect mode different from the continuous effect by the display operation in the second image display device 5B For example, one of the images (still images or moving images) as shown in FIGS. 21E to 21G is displayed. Thus, since the display mode of the effect display performed during the variable display of a plurality of special symbols by the second special symbol display device 4B is changed in the middle, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment. Further, after the big hit gaming state due to the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the second special symbol display device 4B is continuously displaying the variation of the special symbol. By performing the effect display in which the display mode is changed, the player's expectation that the variation display result will be a big hit in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is improved, and the game entertainment is improved. Can do.

  In addition, after the continuous production which is the first production is started, the notification information 60a as shown in FIG. 21A is first displayed on the second image display device 5B, whereby a predetermined period and a predetermined production are displayed. The effect display is notified. Thereafter, when the variation display result is a big hit in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A, according to any of the production patterns P01 to P24 included in the big success time continuous production pattern as shown in FIG. The effect display mode in the effect operation performed together with the decorative pattern variation display by the second image display device 5B is determined. On the other hand, if the variable display result is not a big hit in the special game by the first special symbol display device 4A, according to any of the production patterns P31 to P54 included in the continuous production pattern at the time of loss as shown in FIG. The effect display mode in the effect operation performed along with the decorative symbol variation display by the second image display device 5B is determined. As a result, after the first effect display is performed, the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the effect display is not performed, the jackpot symbol is not stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. With such an effect display, the player recognizes that the predetermined effect display is displayed within a predetermined period and that it is a big hit, and the execution of the game is promoted in the hope that the effect display is performed. The operating rate can be increased. Furthermore, even during the execution of the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the special symbol variation display can be started in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 The operating rate can be increased.

  42. In step S241 shown in FIG. 42, it is determined that the first big hit flag is ON, and in step S245, the number of reserved storage in the special figure storage unit 121 is equal to or greater than a predetermined continuous performance execution allowable value. If it is determined that the continuous production is to be executed as a result of the determination, the variation pattern D (big hit) is selected and determined in step S247. If it is determined in step S252 that the continuous effect is to be executed, the variation pattern D (reach lose) is selected and determined in step S254. In this way, when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the special symbol variation display compared to the other variation patterns so that the variation display of the special symbol by another variation pattern can be executed a plurality of times. The fluctuation pattern is determined so that the time is sufficiently long. As a result, when it is determined in step S245 or S252 that the continuous effect is to be executed, the first effect or the second effect in a plurality of special figure games by the second special symbol display device 4B is surely executed. Can do.

  When it is determined in step S245 shown in FIG. 42 that the number of reserved storage in the special figure storage unit 121 is less than the predetermined continuous performance execution allowable value, the processing in steps S246 and S247 is skipped. When it is determined in step S250 that the number of reserved memories is less than the continuous effect execution allowable value, the process does not proceed to step S252 and the like, so that the continuous effect is executed. No decision is made. In this way, when the number of reserved storages in the special figure storage unit 121 is small (or not at all), the second special is made by not performing the continuous production or the second production as the first production. The first effect and the second effect can be surely executed in a plurality of special figure games by the symbol display device 4B.

  Then, when it is determined in steps S245 and S250 shown in FIG. 42 that the number of reserved storage in the special figure storage unit 121 is less than the predetermined continuous performance execution allowable value, the process of step S255 of FIG. Then, the variation pattern having a shorter variation display time of the special symbol as compared with the variation pattern D (reach loss) or the big hit pattern is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in this special diagram game. Thereby, when the continuous effect or the second effect as the first effect is not executed, the time until the variation display result in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed is wasted. This can be prevented, and the availability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased, and the possibility that the number of reserved memories in the special figure storage unit 121 will reach the upper limit value is reduced. When the number of reserved memories in the special figure holding storage unit 121 reaches the upper limit, even if a game ball wins the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6A or the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the special figure holding memory unit 121 is used for determining a big hit. Numeric data indicating the random number MR1 cannot be stored, giving the player the disadvantage that the special game with the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B will not be performed. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the time until the fluctuation display result in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A from being derived and displayed is unnecessarily long, and the number of reserved memories in the special figure reservation storage unit 121 reaches the upper limit value. By reducing the possibility, it is possible to prevent such a disadvantage from being given to the player.

  When it is determined in step S241 shown in FIG. 42 that the first big hit flag is OFF, the continuous effect is executed in step S252 based on the random value MR6 for determining the continuous effect extracted in step S251. It is determined whether or not to do so. When it is determined in step S252 that the continuous effect is to be executed, the second special symbol display device 4B is the same as when the variation display result of the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is a big hit. During the display of the variation of the special symbol by a plurality of times, any of the notification information 60a to 60d by characters as shown in FIGS. 21A to 21D is continuously performed by the display operation in the second image display device 5B. It is displayed according to the number of executions of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B after starting the production. Thereby, even when the continuous effect as the first effect is executed, the player can easily recognize whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to monotonous gaming. Moreover, since the opportunity for the continuous production to be the first production is increased, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation and improve the game entertainment.

  If it is determined in step S277 shown in FIG. 44 that the value of the effect mode flag is “0” and it is determined that neither the first effect nor the second effect is being executed, extraction is performed in step S279. In step S280, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect based on the random value MR6 for determining the continuous effect. When it is determined in step S280 that the continuous effect is to be executed, it is determined in step S241 that the first big hit flag is on, and in step S245, the special figure reservation storage unit 121 stores the hold. Similarly to the case where it is determined that the number is equal to or larger than the predetermined continuous performance execution allowable value or the determination that the continuous performance is executed in step S252, the second special symbol display device 4B is used. During the variable display of the special symbol a plurality of times, any one of the notification information 60a to 60d using characters as shown in FIGS. 21A to 21D is continuously produced by the display operation in the second image display device 5B. Is displayed according to the number of times of execution of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B since the start of. Thereby, since it is possible to execute the continuous effect as the first effect regardless of the execution state of the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are provided to the player. It is possible to give interest to any of the fluctuation display results of the special figure game by both of them, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  After starting the continuous effect as the first effect in this way, it is determined that the variation display result of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is a big hit before the end of the continuous effect. In some cases, the value of the effect mode flag is set to “2” in any of step S403 in FIG. 48, step S414 in FIG. 49, and step S422 in FIG. After that, when the special symbol game is performed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B corresponds to the fact that the value of the effect mode flag is “2”. During the variable display, the second effect in an effect mode different from the continuous effect is performed by the display operation in the second image display device 5B. For example, an image (a still image or an image as shown in FIGS. (Moving image) is displayed. Thereby, even when the effect display as the second effect is executed, the player can easily recognize whether or not the variation display result of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to monotonous gaming. In addition, since the opportunity to execute the effect display as the second effect increases, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation and improve the game entertainment.

  When it is determined in step S307 in FIG. 47 that the count value of the effect counter is equal to the predetermined continuous effect count “4”, a final effect pattern determination process as shown in FIG. 51 is executed. 52, the big hit time adjustment pattern determination process shown in FIG. 52, the first reach time adjustment pattern determination process shown in FIG. 53, the second reach time adjustment pattern determination process shown in FIG. 54, and the first normal time adjustment pattern determination process shown in FIG. One of the second normal time adjustment pattern determination processes shown in FIG. 56 is executed. In these processes, a variation pattern that is included in a plurality of predetermined variation patterns and has a variation display time shorter than the remaining variation display time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. Among them, the variation pattern having the longest variation display time is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in this special figure game. In this way, by adjusting and setting the variable symbol display time in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the continuous effect and the second effect as the first effect, and the first special symbol display device. The relevance with the change display result in the special figure game by 4A becomes clear, and the impression of the production to the player can be enhanced to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, for example, the CGROM 134 is prepared by storing a plurality of image data having different display modes for each of the symbols included in the decorative symbols # 1 to # 3. In the variation display with the variation patterns A1 to A3, for example. The decorative design # 1 is switched and specified based on the arrangement information of the decorative design # 1 and the animation variation index numbers “1” to “5” in the index data table T11, and the display mode of each design is changed. Different images are identified. Thereby, while displaying the decorative pattern # 1 in a variable manner, an arbitrarily changing display such as an animation is possible, and an image rich in performance can be displayed.

  In the variation display with the variation pattern B1 and the variation patterns C1 to C3, the image data of the symbol to be displayed is switched and specified based on the arrangement information of the ornament symbols # 2 and # 3, so that the ornament symbol # 2 , # 3 is displayed. As a result, variable display without animation is possible, and variable display of a variety of symbols is possible.

  In the variation display with the variation pattern B1, the scroll display in the downward direction, which is the first variation direction, is performed until the variation of the decorative symbol # 2 is stopped. On the other hand, it once returns to the second fluctuation direction, which is the return direction, and then scroll display is again performed in the downward direction, which is the first fluctuation direction again. Thereby, when decoration design # 2 is stopped, it is possible to display an impression that each design is bouncing. In addition, the return position when returning in the return direction is set in accordance with each symbol included in the decorative symbol # 2 as shown in FIG. 17, for example, so that the decorative symbol # 2 includes the character # 1, for example. If the character is present, a return amount can be set in accordance with the characteristics such as the standard weight of each character, and the characteristics in the real world can be reflected.

  In the variation display with the variation patterns C1 to C3, for example, when the index data table T13 shown in FIG. 33 and the variation speed / direction data tables T331 to T333 shown in FIGS. Decorative design # 3 specified from the arrangement information 3 or decoration information specified based on the arrangement information of the decoration design # 3 and the animation variation index numbers “1” to “5” in the index data table T13. The image data of the symbol # 3 is read from the CGROM 134, and the ring effect image data specified based on the ring effect image change and the change order is read from the CGROM 134. An image to be displayed is generated by combining the read image data. Thereby, it is possible to display a variable display image rich in change.

  Further, since the display mode is changed every time a predetermined time such as one frame time is measured, the control burden is small. Further, for example, the display mode is changed by the VDP 133 executing the image display interruption process as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to perform variable display that is rich in change.

  The display areas specified by referring to the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 34A after the respective patterns included in the decorative patterns # 1 to # 3 to be displayed are virtually arranged. The area to be clipped is specified based on the size and position of the. By generating an image to be displayed by the VDP 133 clipping the area thus identified, it is possible to change the size of the display image and to display a variable display image rich in change.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined that the variation display result of the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is a big hit before the end of the continuous production as the first production. During the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game for which the determination has been made, a predetermined effect display which is a part of the continuous effect as the first effect is performed, and the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is displayed. When the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B after the big bonus game state due to the fact that the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result, the special symbol in the started special symbol game is started. It has been described that a predetermined effect display as the second effect is performed during the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even during the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B in which it is determined that the variation display result is a big hit. You may make it perform the effect display used as 2 effects. For example, in step S415 in FIG. 49, the fluctuation pattern γ1 (big hit) is determined, and in step S423 in FIG. 50, the fluctuation pattern γ2 (big hit) is determined. In the big hit time adjustment pattern determination process shown in FIG. 52, the process may proceed to step S508 without executing step S501.

  Thereby, for example, when the start condition of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is established at the timing T6 of the display operation example shown in FIG. 78, the variation pattern α3 (big hit) is used in this special figure game. As shown in FIG. 80, when the start condition for the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied at timing T6, as shown in FIG. As the variation pattern to be obtained, the variation pattern γ2 (big hit) is selected and determined. Thus, in the display operation example shown in FIG. 80, after the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B at the timing T6, the second image is displayed during the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B. The display device 5 </ b> B displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and an effect display by an image as shown in FIG. 21F is performed.

  At the timing T21 when the special symbol variation display time Ti119 in the variation pattern γ2 (big hit) has elapsed from the timing T6 shown in FIG. 80, the second special symbol display device 4B stops and displays the big hit symbol as a confirmed symbol. At this time, in the second image display device 5B, a combination of decorative symbols that is a big hit is derived and displayed. At timing T21, the second special symbol display device 4B stops and displays the jackpot symbol, and the second image display device 5B displays and displays the combination of the decorative symbols as the jackpot combination, whereby the pachinko gaming machine 1 It becomes a big hit gaming state. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 80, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the big hit gaming state during the period from the timing T21 to the timing T22.

  After the big hit gaming state ends at timing T22, when the start condition of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied at timing T23, the same processing as at timing T9 in the display operation example shown in FIG. Thus, for example, the fluctuation pattern δ2 (reach loss) is selected and determined as the fluctuation pattern used in the current special figure game. In this way, in the display operation example shown in FIG. 80, after the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B at the timing T23, the second image is displayed during the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B. The display device 5B displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and the effect display by the image as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at timing T24 when the special symbol variation display time Ti64 in the variation pattern δ2 (reach lose) has elapsed from timing T23, the second special symbol display device 4B stops and displays the lost symbol as a confirmed symbol, and the second image. The display device 5B derives and displays a combination of decorative symbols that will cause reach loss. Subsequently, at timing T25 when the special symbol variation display time Ti88 in the variation pattern D (big hit) has elapsed from the timing T1 shown in FIG. 28, the first special symbol display device 4A stops and displays the big hit symbol as a confirmed symbol. At the same time, in the first image display device 5A, a combination of decorative symbols that is a big hit is derived and displayed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters the big hit gaming state.

  Also, when it is determined that the variation display result of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is a big hit before the end of the continuous production as the first production, the special game In addition to performing the effect display as the second effect during the special symbol variation display at, the special symbol variation display time in the second special symbol display device 4B is set as the remaining special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A. You may set so that it may become longer than the fluctuation display time. In this case, after the special figure game is executed by the second special symbol display device 4B in which the variable display result is a big hit, the effect display such as the first effect and the second effect may not be performed.

  For example, among the big hit patterns shown in FIG. 14, a change pattern in which a predetermined effect display as a second effect is performed, such as a change pattern γ1 (big hit) and a change pattern γ2 (big hit), is changed to a change pattern δ1 (big hit). ) To δ3 (big hit), a plurality of types are prepared so that the change display time of the special symbol is different. In other words, a plurality of types of jackpot patterns on which an effect display by an image as shown in FIG. 21 (E) is performed are prepared in advance according to the varying display times of different special symbols, as shown in FIG. 21 (F). A plurality of types of jackpot patterns in which effect display by simple images is performed are prepared in advance according to the variation display time of different special symbols.

  In step S415 of FIG. 49, a large amount of jackpots prepared in accordance with the timer value in the first variation time timer and the variation display time of different special symbols for effect display as shown in FIG. The timer initial value corresponding to the change display time of the special symbol in each pattern is compared. Based on the result of this comparison, the jackpot pattern having the shortest variation display time is selected from among the jackpot patterns in which the variation display time of the special symbol is longer than the remaining variation display time in the first special symbol display device 4A. The variation pattern used in this special game may be selected and determined. Further, in step S423 of FIG. 50, a large number of jackpots prepared in accordance with the timer value in the first variation time timer and the variation display time of different special symbols for effect display as shown in FIG. The timer initial value corresponding to the change display time of the special symbol in each pattern is compared. Based on the result of this comparison, the jackpot pattern having the shortest variation display time is selected from among the jackpot patterns in which the variation display time of the special symbol is longer than the remaining variation display time in the first special symbol display device 4A. What is necessary is just to select and determine as a fluctuation pattern used for this special figure game. After determining the variation pattern in this manner, the first effect or the second effect during the variation display of a plurality of special symbols by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed in the same way as in steps S451 and S452 of FIG. A process is performed so as not to perform the symbol change display.

  Thereby, for example, when the start condition of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is established at the timing T6 of the display operation example shown in FIG. 78, the variation pattern α3 (big hit) is used in this special figure game. As shown in FIG. 81, when the condition for starting the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied at timing T6, the special pattern in the first special symbol display device 4A is selected. The fluctuation pattern γ2 (big hit) that becomes the fluctuation display time Ti119-2 longer than the remaining fluctuation display time of the symbol (time from the timing T6 to the timing T31 shown in FIG. 81) is the fluctuation pattern used in this special figure game. Will be determined. In this way, in the display operation example shown in FIG. 81, after the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B at the timing T6, the second image is displayed during the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B. The display device 5 </ b> B displays decorative symbols in a variable manner, and an effect display by an image as shown in FIG. 21F is performed.

  In this way, at the timing T31 when the special symbol variation display time Ti88 in the variation pattern D (big hit) has elapsed from the timing T1 shown in FIG. 81, the first special symbol display device 4A stops and displays the big hit symbol as a confirmed symbol. At this time, in the first image display device 5A, a combination of decorative symbols that is a big hit is derived and displayed. At timing T31, the first special symbol display device 4A stops and displays the jackpot symbol, and the first image display device 5A derives and displays a combination of decorative symbols as a jackpot combination, whereby the pachinko gaming machine 1 It becomes a big hit gaming state. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 81, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the big hit gaming state during the period from the timing T31 to the timing T32.

  At timing T33 after the big hit gaming state is ended at timing T32, the elapsed time from timing T6 reaches the special symbol change display time Ti119-2 in the change pattern γ2 (big hit), whereby the second special symbol display device At 4B, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol, and the second image display device 5B displays a combination of the decorative symbols that are big hits, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters the big hit gaming state. In addition, when the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started at the timing T6 shown in FIG. 81, the first effect or the second effect during the multiple special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B is displayed. Since the process for ending the two effects is being executed, even after the jackpot gaming state started at the timing T33 ends, even if the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Unless it is determined that the continuous effect as the first effect is to be executed, the effect display as the first effect or the second effect is not performed.

  Alternatively, when it is determined that the variation display result of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is a big hit before the continuous production as the first production is started and ended, the second special The variation display time of the special symbol in the symbol display device 4B may be set to be sufficiently longer than the remaining variation display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. In this case, after the jackpot gaming state due to the big win symbol being derived and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the game is further performed by the first special symbol display device 4A. During the special symbol variation display, an effect display as the second effect may be performed.

  In this case, in step S415 of FIG. 49 or step S423 of FIG. 50, the variation pattern having a variation display time sufficiently longer than the remaining variation display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is displayed as the special pattern of this time. Determine the variation pattern used in the game. Also, in the variation start process executed in the first special symbol process shown in FIG. 42, after the processes in steps S243, S244, and S249 are executed, the effect mode flag is set as in step S297 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the value is “0”. When the value of the effect mode flag is “0”, the process proceeds to S245 and S250 in FIG. 42. On the other hand, when the value of the effect mode flag is other than “0”, steps S307 to S307 shown in FIG. The same processing as S309 is executed.

  Thereby, for example, when the start condition of the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is established at the timing T6 of the display operation example shown in FIG. 82, the remaining variation display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A. The variation pattern α3 (big hit) that becomes the variation display time Ti102-2 sufficiently longer than the time (time from the timing T6 to the timing T41 shown in FIG. 82) is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in this special figure game. Will be. Thus, in the display operation example shown in FIG. 82, after the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B at the timing T6, the second image is displayed during the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B. The display device 5B displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and effects display by the notification information 60c as shown in FIG.

  At the timing T41 when the special symbol variation display time Ti88 in the variation pattern D (big hit) has elapsed from the timing T1 shown in FIG. 82, the big special symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. At this time, in the first image display device 5A, a combination of decorative symbols that is a big hit is derived and displayed. At timing T41, the first special symbol display device 4A stops and displays the jackpot symbol, and the first image display device 5A derives and displays a combination of decorative symbols as a jackpot combination, whereby the pachinko gaming machine 1 It becomes a big hit gaming state. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 82, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the big hit gaming state during the period from the timing T41 to the timing T42.

  After the big hit gaming state ends at timing T42, when the start condition of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied at timing T43, the value of the effect mode flag is “2”, Since the count value of the number counter is “4”, a process for determining whether or not the first big hit flag is on as a process in which step S441 of FIG. 51 is adapted to the first special symbol display device 4A. Execute. When the first big hit flag is OFF, the timer value in the first variation time timer and the variation pattern δ1 (reach loss) to δ3 are processed as the processing in which step S531 in FIG. 54 is adapted to the first special symbol display device 4A. A process of comparing the timer initial values corresponding to the fluctuation display times Ti63 to Ti65 of the special symbol in (reach lose) is executed.

  Thus, the remaining variation display time of the special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is equal to or shorter than the variation display time Ti64 of the special symbol in the variation pattern δ2 (reach loss), and the variation pattern δ1 (reach loss). ) Is longer than the special symbol variation display time Ti63, the variation pattern δ1 is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in the current special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. In this way, in the display operation example shown in FIG. 82, after the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started at the timing T43, the special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 4A is in progress. The first image display device 5A displays the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, and the effect display by the image as shown in FIG.

  At timing T44 when the special symbol variation display time Ti63 in the variation pattern δ1 (reach lose) has elapsed from timing T43 shown in FIG. 82, the first special symbol display device 4A stops and displays the lost symbol as a confirmed symbol. At this time, the first image display device 5A derives and displays a combination of decorative symbols that will cause reach loss. Thereafter, at timing T45 when the special symbol variation display time Ti102-2 in the variation pattern α3 (big hit) has elapsed from timing T6 shown in FIG. 82, the second special symbol display device 4B stops and displays the big hit symbol as a confirmed symbol. At the same time, in the second image display device 5B, a combination of decorative symbols that is a big hit is derived and displayed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters the big hit gaming state.

  Further, the second special symbol display device that is executed based on the jackpot determination random number MR1 stored in the special figure holding storage unit 121 when it is determined that the continuous effect as the first effect is to be executed. During the variation display of the special symbol by 4B, while the effect display that becomes a part of the continuous effect as the first effect is performed, the game ball is given to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B after the determination that the continuous effect is executed is made. During the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B, which is executed based on the jackpot determination random number MR1 extracted based on winning, the effect display as the second effect is performed. It may be. In this case, the special figure reservation storage unit 121 can store and store the presentation mode data indicating the value of the presentation mode flag together with the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for jackpot determination and the start winning data. deep. Then, after it is determined in step S206 in FIG. 38 that the detection signal from the second start prize opening switch 41b is in the on state, the number of reserved memories in the special figure reservation storage unit 121 is the upper limit value in step S207. If it is determined that the performance mode flag has not been reached, the value of the effect mode flag is checked. For example, in step S210, the effect mode data is stored together with the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 and the start winning data, and the special figure reservation storage unit 121 To store. In addition to the reach loss pattern shown in FIG. 14, the reach loss pattern of the variation pattern γ1 in which the effect display by the image as shown in FIG. 21E is performed and the image as shown in FIG. A reach loss pattern of the variation pattern γ2 on which the effect display is performed is prepared in advance. In this example, it is assumed that the continuous performance execution allowable value is predetermined as “2”.

  Thereafter, when the stored data associated with the hold number “k” is read in step S282 in FIG. 45, it is determined whether or not the current value in the effect mode flag is “1” and is read. It is determined whether or not the value of the effect mode flag indicated by the effect mode data included in the stored data is “1”. When the current value in the effect mode flag is “1” and the value of the effect mode flag indicated by the effect mode data read from the special figure holding storage unit 121 is “1”, Update the value to “2”.

  For example, when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed at the timing T50 in the display operation example shown in FIG. 83, the start winning data “second” is associated with the stored data in the special figure storage unit 121. It is assumed that there are two numerical data indicating the jackpot determination random number value MR1 attached and stored. In this case, when the start condition of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is established at the timing T52 and the timing T54, there is a variation pattern for performing an effect display that becomes a part of the continuous effect as the first effect. As a variation pattern used in the special figure game this time, it is selected and determined. In the display operation example shown in FIG. 83, when the start condition of the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied at the timing T52, the fluctuation pattern α1 (normal loss) is the fluctuation pattern used in the current special figure game. When the start condition for the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied at the timing T54, the fluctuation pattern α2 (normally lost) is used as the fluctuation pattern used in this special figure game. The selection has been determined.

  Thus, after the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B at the timing T52, the decorative image is displayed on the second image display device 5B during the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is displayed, and an effect display by the notification information 60a as shown in FIG. 21A is performed. After this, at time T53 when the special symbol variation display time Ti40 in the variation pattern α1 (normal loss) has elapsed from timing T52, the second special symbol display device 4B stops and displays the second symbol display. A combination of decorative symbols that are normally lost is derived and displayed on the device 5B. In addition, after the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B at the timing T54, the decorative image is displayed on the second image display device 5B during the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B. In addition, the effect display by the notification information 60b as shown in FIG. 21B is performed. Thereafter, at timing T55 when the special symbol variation display time Ti41 in the variation pattern α2 (normal loss) has elapsed from timing T54, the second special symbol display device 4B stops displaying the lost symbol and displays the second image. A combination of decorative symbols that are normally lost is derived and displayed on the device 5B.

  After two game balls are won in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B after the decision to execute the continuous performance is made at the timing T50 shown in FIG. 83, a numerical value indicating the random value MR1 for jackpot determination The effect mode data indicating the value “1” of the effect mode flag is stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 121 together with the data and the start winning data “second”. At time T56, when the special symbol game start condition by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied, the value of the effect mode flag is “1”, and the special symbol holding storage unit 121 reads the value. Since the value of the effect mode flag indicated by the effect mode data is “1”, the value of the effect mode flag is updated to “2”. Thereafter, in the display operation example shown in FIG. 83, the variation pattern γ2 (reach loss) is selected and determined as the variation pattern used in this special figure game. In this way, after the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B at the timing T56, the special image is displayed on the second image display device 5B while the special symbol is being displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. While the variable display is performed, the effect display by the image as shown in FIG.

  At timing T57 when the special symbol fluctuation display time Ti59 in the fluctuation pattern γ2 (reach loss) has elapsed from timing T56, the second special symbol display device 4B stops and displays the lost symbol, and the second image display device 5B. A combination of decorative symbols that will reach reach is displayed. Subsequently, when the condition for starting the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is established at the timing T58, the value of the effect mode flag is “2” and the count value of the effect counter is “4”. Therefore, it is determined in step S441 in FIG. 51 whether or not the second big hit flag is on. When the second big hit flag is OFF, in step S531 in FIG. 54, the timer value in the first variation time timer and the special symbol variation display times Ti63 to Ti65 in the variation patterns δ1 (reach lose) to δ3 (reach lose). Compare the timer initial value corresponding to.

  In this way, the remaining variation display time of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as or shorter than the variation display time Ti65 of the special symbol in the variation pattern δ3 (reach loss), and the variation pattern δ2 (reach loss) ) Is longer than the special symbol fluctuation display time Ti64, the fluctuation pattern δ2 (reach lose) is selected and determined as the fluctuation pattern used in the current special figure game. In this way, in the display operation example shown in FIG. 83, after the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B at the timing T58, during the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4B. The second image display device 5B displays the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols, and the effect display by the image as shown in FIG.

  At time T59 when the special symbol variation display time Ti64 in the variation pattern δ2 (reach lose) has elapsed from timing T58 shown in FIG. At this time, the second image display device 5B derives and displays a combination of decorative symbols that will cause reach loss. Thereafter, at the timing T60 when the variation display time Ti88 of the special symbol in the variation pattern D (big hit) has elapsed from the timing T50 shown in FIG. In the first image display device 5A, a combination of decorative symbols that is a big hit is derived and displayed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters the big hit gaming state.

  In the above embodiment, when the decorative design # 3 is variably displayed in any of the variation patterns C1 to C3, the data of “image C” or “image D” is read from the variation speed / direction data table T333. Scroll display of decorative design # 3 by reading out image data of decorative design # 3 when read out, reading out image data for ring effect, and synthesizing the read image data to generate an image to be displayed In addition to the animation display and the animation display, it has been explained that the animation display by the ring effect image can be executed in parallel. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, image data obtained by combining a plurality of display images for display in a decorative design image may be stored in advance in the CGROM 134 or the like.

  As a specific example, as shown in FIGS. 84 (A) and 84 (B), the CGROM 134 includes image data in which a ring effect image having a plurality of display modes is combined with an image of the decorative design # 3. This is stored in units of symbols included in the decorative symbol # 3 in accordance with image changes in the image for use. Here, the image data shown in FIG. 84A does not display the animation of the decorative pattern # 3 by changing the display mode of the character # 2 or the character # 3 included in the decorative pattern # 3 (no graphic animation). If the symbol numbers are the same, there is no change in the image of the decorative symbol # 3 synthesized with the ring effect image. On the other hand, the image data shown in FIG. 84 (B) displays the animation of the decorative pattern # 3 by changing the display mode of the character # 2 and the character # 3 included in the decorative pattern # 3 (design animation). Yes), even if the symbol number is the same, the image of the decorative symbol # 3 synthesized in accordance with the image change of the ring effect image is also changed.

  In order to control the display operation based on the image data as shown in FIGS. 84A and 84B, the ROM 131 mounted on the display control board 12 stores an index data table T14 as shown in FIG. ing. From the index data table T14 shown in FIG. 85, it is possible to specify the address where the ring with numbers and the image data of the characters # 2 and # 3 are stored in the CGROM 134 as in the index data table T13 shown in FIG. The address at which the synthesized image data such as no symbol animation or symbol animation is stored in the CGROM 134 can be specified. That is, from the index data table T14 shown in FIG. 85, it can be specified that the synthesized image data without the design animation is stored in the area of addresses 60000H to 649FFH in the CGROM 134, and the synthesized image with the design animation is included. It can be specified that data is stored in the area of addresses 70000H to 749FFH in the CGROM 134.

  In addition, in a predetermined area of the ROM 131, as the fluctuation speed / direction data table prepared corresponding to the fluctuation patterns C1 to C3, the fluctuation speed / direction data tables T331 to T331 shown in FIGS. Instead of T333, fluctuating speed / direction data tables T341 to T343 as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (C) may be stored. Then, when the decorative design is variably displayed in any one of the variation patterns C1 to C3, even if the processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87 is executed as the image display control processing in step S594 shown in FIG. Good.

  In the process shown in FIG. 87, the display control CPU 130 specifies the number of extracted symbols (step S631), specifies the symbols to be extracted (step S632), specifies in the same manner as the processes in steps S621 to S626 shown in FIG. The virtual placement of the symbol (step S633), the position of the display area on the virtually placed image (step S634), the area to be clipped (step S635), the address of the image data to be read Each process of specific (step S636) is performed. Thereafter, in the process shown in FIG. 87, it is not necessary to execute the process of specifying the address of the ring effect image data as in steps S627 and S628 shown in FIG. That is, since the CGROM 134 stores image data in which the ring effect image and the decorative pattern # 3 image are synthesized in advance, the address of the image data specified in step S636 is the synthesized image as it is. It becomes the address of data. Therefore, after executing the processing of step S636 shown in FIG. 87, the display control CPU 130 decorates the ring with numbers to be developed on the VRAM 135, the addresses of the image data of the characters # 2 and # 3, or the ring effect image. Generate drawing command and / or attribute data to specify the address of image data combined with design # 3, layout, enlargement / reduction ratio, transmittance, clipping range, presence / absence of combining with ring effect image, etc. What is necessary is just to transmit with respect to VDP133 (step S637).

  An example of the image processing operation when the decorative design # 3 is variably displayed in any one of the variation patterns C1 to C3 in such a setting will be described. In this image processing operation, an index data table T14 shown in FIG. 85 and fluctuating speed / direction data tables T341 to T343 as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (C) are used. First, the image processing operation when the animation display by switching the ring effect image is not performed is the index data table T13 shown in FIG. 33 or the fluctuation speed / direction data table T331 shown in FIGS. This is the same as when T333 is used.

  On the other hand, for example, when the decorative display pattern # 3 is variably displayed in any one of the variability patterns C1 to C3, when the variation display mode becomes reach, animation display is performed by switching the ring effect image. In this case, an image processing operation different from that in the case of using the index data table T13 shown in FIG. 33 and the changing speed / direction data tables T331 to T333 shown in FIGS. 36 (A) to (C) is performed. As a specific example, after the same decorative design # 3 is stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR in the variation pattern C1, the variation display mode becomes reach, and then FIG. C) The data indicating that “change direction” indicates “standard (↓)”, “no animation” data, and “image E” data are read from the change speed / direction data table T343 shown in FIG. (For example, an entry on the 11th row corresponding to the variation pattern C1).

  At this time, first, for example, as in a region A shown in FIG. 88, decorative symbols # 3 specified as symbols to be extracted are virtually arranged in the vertical direction. In FIG. 88, in order to show a state of switching to image data in which a ring effect image is combined with an image of decorative design # 3, five decorative designs # 3 are arranged and shown in the vertical direction. However, actually four symbols are arranged in the vertical direction. In the area A shown in FIG. 88, scroll display in the downward direction is executed by changing the range of the display area in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as time passes (count value update). In this area A, the position of the display area moves to areas H1, H2, H3, H4, and H5 shown in FIG. 88 according to the elapsed time.

  Subsequently, in order to start the animation display by switching the ring effect image, in the horizontal direction, the symbol animation corresponding to the same symbol (symbol number) is read based on the reading of the data of “Image E”. Those having the index number “1” or “2” of the animation variation in the synthesized image data without data are virtually arranged and arranged. Here, the animation fluctuation index numbers “1” and “2” in the synthesized image data without the design animation are used as the first image specifying information. Thus, in the area corresponding to the first image specifying information shown in FIG. 88, the range of the display area in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction is changed with the passage of time (the update of the count value), thereby scrolling downward. Along with the display, it is possible to execute an animation display by switching a ring effect image synthesized in advance on the image of the decorative design # 3. In this area, the position of the display area moves to areas I1 and I2 shown in FIG. 88 according to the elapsed time.

  Further, following the arrangement of the symbols in the area corresponding to the first image specifying information, in the horizontal direction, the index number of the animation variation in the synthesized image data without the symbol animation corresponding to the same symbol (symbol number). Are virtually arranged in the order of increasing from “3” to “5”. Here, the animation fluctuation index numbers “3” to “5” in the synthesized image data without the design animation are used as the second image specifying information. Thus, in the area corresponding to the second image specifying information shown in FIG. 88, the range of the display area in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction is changed with the passage of time (the update of the count value), thereby scrolling downward. Along with the display, it is possible to execute an animation display by switching a ring effect image synthesized in advance on the image of the decorative design # 3. In this area, the position of the display area moves to areas I3, I4, and I5 shown in FIG. 88 according to the elapsed time. Further, the display control CPU 130 includes a pointer for specifying the animation variation index numbers “3” to “5” in the synthesized image data that is the second image specifying information. The synthesized image to be displayed may be specified by repeatedly updating within the range of “5”.

  89 (A) to 89 (C) show the decorative pattern # 3 using the index data table T14 shown in FIG. 85 and the fluctuating speed / direction data tables T341 to T343 shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (C). It is a timing diagram which shows the example of a display operation when carrying out the variable display of fluctuation pattern C1-C3. In the display operation example with the variation patterns C1 to C3 shown in FIGS. 89 (A) to 89 (C), the decorative symbols # 3 are displayed on the variable display portions DL, DC, and DR of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. When the variable display is started, scroll display is performed in the downward direction in each variable display unit. At this time, based on the fact that the data whose “change direction” is “standard (↓)” is read from the change speed / direction data tables T341 to T343 shown in FIGS. By referring to the size data table T20, the size of the display area in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions DL, DC, DR can be displayed for three decorative symbols # 3. It is a big size.

  In the “left” variable display portion DL, the fluctuation speed and direction specified by the fluctuation speed / direction data table T341 shown in FIG. 86 (A) and the decorative symbol # 3 in the index data table T14 shown in FIG. It becomes a display target based on the arrangement of decorative symbols # 3 specified corresponding to the symbol numbers “0” to “9” (numbered ring shown in FIG. 85 and the vertical direction of characters # 2 and # 3). The arrangement information of decorative design # 3 is specified.

  At this time, since “no animation” data is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T341, the display of the size specified by the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. The image data of decorative design # 3 to be displayed in the region is specified. The VDP 133 reads the image data of the decorative pattern # 3 specified in this way from the CGROM 134, and displays the image data by, for example, clipping the image data developed on the VRAM 135 based on the read image data and the size of the display area. Generate an image. Then, for example, by repeating the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B every predetermined time which is one frame time, the decorative symbol is displayed on the “left” variable display portion DL. The scroll display of # 3 can be performed.

  In the “right” variable display section DR, the display target is displayed in the same manner as the “left” variable display section DL from the fluctuation speed and direction specified by the fluctuation speed / direction data table T342 shown in FIG. The arrangement information of the decorative design # 3 is specified, and the image data of the decorative design # 3 to be displayed is specified based on the specified arrangement information. The image data of the decorative design # 3 specified in this way is read out by the VDP 133, and an image to be displayed is generated. Then, by repeating the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, scroll display of the decorative pattern # 3 can be performed on the “right” variable display portion DR. .

  In the “middle” variable display portion DC, the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL, DR are determined based on the variation speed and direction specified by the variation speed / direction data table T343 shown in FIG. Similarly, the arrangement information of the decorative design # 3 to be displayed is specified, and the image data of the decorative design # 3 to be displayed is specified based on the specified arrangement information. The image data of the decorative design # 3 specified in this way is read out by the VDP 133, and an image to be displayed is generated. Then, by repeating the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, scroll display of the decorative symbol # 3 can be performed on the “medium” variable display unit DC. .

  Subsequently, in the display operation example of the variation pattern C1 shown in FIG. 89 (A), the variation display of the left symbol is stopped. At this time, the size of the display area in the “left” variable display portion DL is such that three decorative symbols # 3 can be displayed. Since the data “with animation” is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T341, the array information corresponding to the “left” variable display portion DL and the animation fluctuation index number “1” in the index data table T14. To “5” (horizontal direction shown in FIG. 85), the decorative pattern # 3 to be displayed in the display area of the size specified by the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. Image data is identified. At this time, by reading the data of “image A” from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T341, the image data of the symbol composed of the combination of the numbered ring and the character # 2 is specified as the decorative symbol # 3 to be displayed. Is done. The image data of the decorative design # 3 specified in this way is read out by the VDP 133, and an image to be displayed is generated. Then, the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B is repeated. Thereby, it is possible to perform the animation display of the decorative pattern # 3 whose fluctuation has been stopped at the “left” variable display portion DL.

  After this, the variation display mode of the decorative design # 3 becomes reach by stopping the variation display of the right design. At this time, since “animation present” data is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T342, the array information corresponding to the “right” variable display section DR and the animation fluctuation index number “1” in the index data table T14. ”To“ 5 ”(the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 85), the decorative pattern # to be displayed in the display area of the size specified by the display area size data table T20 shown in FIG. 3 image data are identified. At this time, by reading the data of “image A” from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T342, the image data of the symbol composed of the combination of the numbered ring and the character # 2 is specified as the decorative symbol # 3 to be displayed. Is done. In this way, animation display can also be performed on the decorative symbol # 3 whose fluctuation has stopped in the “right” variable display portion DR.

  Further, since the data of “image E” is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T343 shown in FIG. 86C, the animation fluctuation index numbers “1” to “5” in the index data table T14 (FIG. 85). The horizontal direction) indicates the image change and the change order in the synthesized image without the symbol animation. Based on the image change thus specified and the order of change, the image data of the synthesized image to be displayed is specified.

  The VDP 133 reads the image data of the identified composite image from the CGROM 134 and generates a composite image to be displayed. Then, the process of displaying on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B is repeated. As a result, an image in which the ring effect image is combined with the decorative pattern # 3 variably displayed on the “middle” variable display unit DC is displayed. For example, “explosion”, “smoke”, “flame” The animation display that changes in order such as “extinguishing fire” can be executed in parallel with the scroll display.

  In the display operation example of the fluctuation pattern C2 shown in FIG. 89 (B), the index data is also read when the data of “image E” is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T343 shown in FIG. 86 (C). According to the animation variation index numbers “1” to “5” (horizontal direction shown in FIG. 85) in the table T14, the image change and change order in the synthesized image without the symbol animation, and the synthesized image data to be displayed. Is identified. Then, the image data of the composite image in which the VDP 133 is specified is read from the CGROM 134, a composite image to be displayed is generated, and displayed on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. By repeating, the animation display by switching the ring effect image can be executed in parallel with the scroll display.

  Further, in the display operation example of the fluctuation pattern C3 shown in FIG. 89C, when the data of “image F” is read from the fluctuation speed / direction data table T343 shown in FIG. 86C, the index data table T14 is read. The animation change index numbers “1” to “5” in FIG. 85 (the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 85) specify the image change and change order in the synthesized image with the design animation, and the synthesized image data to be displayed. Is done. Then, the image data of the synthesized image in which the VDP 133 is specified is read from the CGROM 134, a synthesized image to be displayed is generated, and displayed on the corresponding one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. repeat. Thereby, the animation display by switching the ring effect image can be executed in parallel with the animation display and scroll display of the decorative pattern # 3 itself.

  In this way, in the variation display with the variation patterns C1 to C3, for example, when the index data table T14 shown in FIG. 85 and the variation speed / direction data tables T341 to T343 shown in FIGS. 86A to 86C are used. Is based on the index numbers “1” to “5” of the animation variation in the index data table T14, and the combined image data with no symbol animation or with symbol animation is specified. The image data specified in this way is read from the CGROM 134 and a synthesized image to be displayed is generated. As a result, the process of combining the two images when the effect image such as the ring effect image and the image of the decorative symbol # 3 are displayed is omitted, and the decorative symbol # 3 in which the effect image is combined is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to display a variable display image rich in change.

  In addition, the display mode (pattern) of each symbol included in the decorative symbol # 1 used in the variation patterns A1 to A3 is displayed as a different animation depending on, for example, which of the variation patterns A1 to A3. It may be possible to change to In this case, for example, together with the image data of the number # 1 included in the decorative pattern # 1 corresponding to the animation variation mode of the pattern as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, for example, FIG. The image data of the number # 1 included in the decorative pattern # 1 corresponding to the animation variation mode of the pattern as shown in (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the CGROM 134 or the like.

  For example, when the decorative pattern # 1 is variably displayed in one of the variation patterns A1 and A2, the display mode of each symbol is changed in the animation variation mode as shown in FIGS. 3 (A) and 3 (B). Next, the image data to be read from the CGROM 134 is specified. On the other hand, for example, when the decorative symbol # 2 is variably displayed in the variation pattern A3, the CGROM 134 changes the display mode of each symbol in the animation variation mode as shown in FIGS. 90 (A) and (B). The image data to be read from is specified. Alternatively, even when the decorative pattern # 1 is variably displayed in any of the variation patterns A1 to A3, each symbol is displayed in the animation variation mode as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B at the start of the variation display. The image data to be read from the CGROM 134 is specified so as to change the display mode. Then, when the variable display mode becomes reach, when the jackpot effect display based on the combination of the confirmed decorative pattern is a jackpot combination, and further, a notice for notifying that the jackpot or reach will be reached When a condition for executing a certain effect such as a performance (a jackpot notice, a reach notice) is established, the display mode of each symbol is changed in an animation variation mode as shown in FIGS. 90 (A) and (B). The image data to be read from the CGROM 134 may be switched.

  Utilizing the fact that the decorative design # 2 used in the variation pattern B1 is composed of a combination of the number # 2 and the character # 1, for example, the variation display as shown in FIGS. 91 (A) to (G) is performed. It may be. In this variable display, first, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the number # 2 and the character # 1 are displayed on the variable display portions DL, DC, DR of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The variation of the decorative pattern # 2 composed of the combination is started.

  Subsequently, the left symbol and the right symbol stop sequentially. At this time, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), when the variable display mode becomes reach, the next symbols appear on the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR, and collide with the symbols that have been stopped until then. Then stop. Thus, the symbols are aligned on the two combination effective lines composed of the upper and lower stages, and reach is established. The establishment of reach with two combination effective lines is also referred to as double reach. At this time, similarly to the case of the fluctuation pattern B1, the fluctuation display may be performed so as to bounce with the return amount corresponding to the type of the symbol to be stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 91 (C) and (D), the image of the character # 1 included in the decorative design # 2 disappears by moving in the direction toward the outside of the display area, and the number # 2 Only to be displayed. Note that the method of eliminating the image of the character # 1 from the display area is arbitrary. Then, as shown in FIGS. 91 (E) to (G), in the period in which the variation of the middle symbol continues, the “left” and “right” variable display portions DL and DR are animated only by the number # 2. Display is performed.

  When the variation of the middle symbol is stopped in this way, the variation display that bounces with the return amount corresponding to the type of the symbol to be stopped may be performed as in the case of the variation pattern B1. Finally, when the middle symbol variation display ends, the big hit or the loss is determined. According to such variable display, various displays can be performed by changing the display mode of each symbol before and after the variable display mode becomes reach, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, when a large number of symbols are displayed in a limited display area, the display area can be used effectively.

  In the embodiment described above, when the decorative display of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B is started, the decorative symbols # 1 to # 3 are displayed corresponding to the variable pattern in the variable display. It demonstrated as what switches a display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols displayed on the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B may be fixed to any of the decorative symbols # 1 to # 3. . For example, only the decorative symbol # 3 may be displayed on the first image display device 5A, and only the decorative symbol # 1 may be displayed on the second image display device 5B. In this case, the variation pattern of the decoration pattern # 3 in the first image display device 5A is not such that a decoration pattern other than the decoration pattern # 3 such as the variation patterns A1 to A3 and the variation pattern B1 is not used. A pattern determination table corresponding to the first image display device 5A is provided, and the variation pattern of the decoration pattern # 1 in the second image display device 5B is a decoration other than the decoration pattern # 1, such as the variation pattern B1 or the variation patterns C1 to C3. What is necessary is just to provide the pattern determination table corresponding to the 2nd image display apparatus 5B so that a design may not be used. Alternatively, any one of the decorative symbols # 1 to # 3 may be used to perform the variable display according to any of the variable patterns A1 to A3, B1, and C1 to C3, and the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. The variation pattern may be determined using a common pattern determination table.

  In the above embodiment, when the special symbol indicating “3” is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, it is usually a big hit, and “7” is displayed. It has been described that the special symbol shown is usually a big hit when it is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if any special symbol that is variably displayed in the special game is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it may be controllable to the big hit gaming state.

  Further, in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, different special symbols may be set so as to be a normal big hit symbol or a probable big hit symbol. For example, in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, a special symbol indicating “3” is usually a big hit when the special symbol indicating “3” is derived and displayed as a confirmed symbol, while in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, When the special symbol indicating “5” is derived and displayed as a confirmed symbol, it may be a normal big hit. Further, in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the special symbol indicating “7” is a probable big hit when the special symbol indicating “7” is derived and displayed as the confirmed symbol, whereas in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, When the special symbol indicating “1” is derived and displayed as a fixed symbol, it may be a probable big hit.

  In this way, the special symbols that result in the specific display may be the same special symbols in the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, or may be different special symbols. Further, the combination of decorative designs that result in the specific display may be the same combination of decorative designs in the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, or may be a combination of different decorative designs. . In addition, it may be a specific display result when only one of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the predetermined symbol, or when both the special symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped with the predetermined symbol. It may be a specific display result.

  Further, the arrangement of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B and the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B can be arbitrarily changed according to the configuration and specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B and the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B do not need to be configured as independent display devices, for example, two displays included in one display device. In the area, substantially the same display as that of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B and the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B described above may be performed.

  Further, each of the two display devices operates as one of the above-described first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, or one of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. It may be a thing. For example, a period in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operating with power supplied is divided into a first period and a second period, and one of the two display devices is a first special symbol in the first period. While operating as the display device 4A, the other operates as the second special symbol display device 4B. In contrast, in the second period, one of the two display devices operates as the second special symbol display device 4B and the other operates as the first special symbol display device 4A.

  Alternatively, of the two display devices, the one in which the condition for starting the special symbol game is established first and the variation display of the special symbol is started may operate as the first special symbol display device 4A described above. Then, when the condition for starting the special symbol game by the other display device on which the special symbol is stopped and displayed during the execution of the special symbol game is established, the other special display is displayed on the other display device. It may be operated as the device 4B.

  Further, the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B have all or part of the functions as the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B. In addition, the special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. Alternatively, the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B have all or a part of the functions of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, and for example, display the variation of the special symbols and display the decorative symbols. You may make it perform the fluctuation display of this, various production | presentation displays, etc. Furthermore, when the variation display result of the identification information in both the first special symbol display device 4A and the first image display device 5A is a big hit as the specific display result, or the second special symbol display device 4B and the second image. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state when the variation display result of the identification information on both the display devices 5B becomes the big hit as the specific display result. That is, while both the first special symbol display device 4A and the first image display device 5A perform the variable display of the identification information as the first image display means, the second special symbol display device 4B and the second image display device 5B. Both of them may display the variation of the identification information as the second image display means.

  In the above embodiment, when the determination or determination to execute the continuous effect is made, each of the variation patterns used in the multiple special-purpose games constituting the continuous effect each time the second start condition is satisfied. In the above description, these are determined sequentially. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the determination or determination that the continuous production is to be executed, when the first second start condition is satisfied, the special game is a plurality of times that constitute the continuous production. All of the variation patterns to be used may be determined as continuous production patterns. In this case, among the big hit time continuous effect patterns shown in FIG. 57, the big hit time continuous effect in which the continuous effect pattern consisting only of the fluctuation pattern at the time of normal loss or reach loss and the predetermined continuous effect pattern determining random value are registered in association with each other. The pattern determination table and the continuous production pattern at the time of losing in which the continuous production pattern consisting only of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the normal loss or reach loss and the predetermined continuous production pattern among the continuous production patterns at the time of losing shown in FIG. 58 are registered in association with each other. The determination table is stored in advance in the ROM.

  Then, after the determination or determination to execute the continuous effect is made, when the second start condition is first satisfied, in the continuous effect pattern determination process of FIG. 48, the count value in the effect counter in step S401. Is determined to be “1”, and subsequently, it is determined whether the first big hit flag is ON or OFF. Here, when the first big hit flag is on, the big hit time continuous production pattern determination table is set as a table for determining the continuous production pattern, while when it is off, the lost big continuous production pattern is determined. Set the table. Next, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined random number value for determining the continuous effect pattern from the random number circuit 104, and determines the big success time continuous effect pattern determination table or the lost effect continuous effect pattern based on the extracted random value for determining the continuous effect pattern. The continuous production pattern used in the current continuous production is selected and determined using the table. Subsequently, the CPU 103 specifies the variation pattern set to be used in the first special figure game during the execution from the selected and determined continuous effect pattern determination table, and whether the second jackpot flag is on. Determine whether it is off.

  If the result of this determination is that the second big hit flag is off, the variation pattern specified from the continuous performance pattern determination table is determined as the variation pattern used in the current special figure game. On the other hand, when the second big hit flag is on, the big hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified from the continuous performance pattern determination table is determined as the fluctuation pattern used in the current special figure game. Here, since the variation pattern specified from the continuous effect pattern determination table is the variation pattern α1 (normal loss) or the variation pattern α1 (reach loss), the variation pattern α1 ( Jackpot) will be determined. When the second big hit flag is on, the production mode flag and the production counter are cleared to zero to stop the execution of the continuous production, and the variation pattern used in this special figure game is shown in FIG. 22 (C). The pattern determination table may be used to determine the variation patterns A1 (big hit) to A3 (big hit), B1 (big hit), and C1 (big hit) to C3 (big hit). Thereafter, in step S310 of FIG. 47, a second variation display start command corresponding to the variation pattern determined as described above is sent to the display control board 12, or in step S312, a special change in the determined variation pattern is sent. A timer initial value corresponding to the symbol variation display time may be set in the second variation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 124.

  Thereafter, when the second start condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous effect, in the continuous effect pattern determination process of FIGS. 48 to 50 and the final effect pattern determination process of FIG. When the second big hit flag is off, the variation pattern specified from the selected and determined continuous performance pattern determination table is determined as the variation pattern used in this special figure game. Is done. On the other hand, when the second big hit flag is ON, the big hit hour fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified from the continuous performance pattern determination table is determined as the fluctuation pattern used in this special figure game. When the second big hit flag is on, the production mode flag and the production counter are cleared to zero to end the continuous production, and the variation pattern used in this special figure game is the big hit pattern shown in FIG. The determination table may be used to determine one of the variation patterns A1 (big hit) to A3 (big hit), B1 (big hit), and C1 (big hit) to C3 (big hit). In this way, after the determination or determination to execute the continuous performance is made, all the variation patterns used in the multiple special-figure games constituting the continuous performance when the first second start condition is satisfied. Can be determined as a continuous performance pattern.

  Furthermore, the determination of the continuous effect pattern may be performed when a determination or determination to execute the continuous effect is made. In this case, when it is determined in step S245 of the variation start time process shown in FIG. 42 that the continuous effect is to be executed because the continuous effect execution allowable value is exceeded (step S245; Yes), steps S246 and S247. Before or after Step S246 or between Steps S246 and S247, first, a table for determining a continuous effect pattern at a big hit is set as a table for determining a continuous effect pattern, and then a predetermined continuous effect pattern is determined by the random number circuit 104. If the random effect value is extracted, and the continuous effect pattern used in the current continuous effect is selected and determined using the table for determining the continuous effect pattern at the big hit based on the extracted random value for determining the continuous effect pattern Good.

  If it is determined in step S252 that a continuous effect is to be executed (step S252; Yes), a continuous effect pattern is first created before and after steps S253 and S254, or between steps S253 and S254. A table for determining a continuous production pattern at the time of losing is set as a table for determining, then, a random value for determining a predetermined continuous production pattern is extracted from the random number circuit 104, and based on the extracted random number for determining a continuous production pattern The continuous effect pattern used in the current continuous effect may be selected and determined using the table for determining the continuous effect pattern at the time of losing. In this way, when it is determined or determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, all the variation patterns used in the multiple special-purpose games constituting the continuous effect can be determined as the continuous effect pattern. .

  In the above embodiment, the continuous effect is executed when the second reserved memory number in the special figure reservation storage unit 121 is equal to or greater than the continuous effect execution allowable value in steps S245 and S250 of FIG. 42 and step S278 of FIG. It has been described that the determination is made to the effect and the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous effect is performed, and when it is less than the continuous effect execution allowable value, the continuous effect is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of whether or not the second reserved storage number in the special figure storage unit 121 is equal to or greater than the continuous effect execution allowable value, the continuous effect is executed. You may make it possible to determine or to determine whether or not to execute a continuous performance.

  In this case, after starting the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game with the variation pattern D by the first special symbol display device 4A, the main board 11 is used when the variation display time of the special symbol is extended and reset. A display control command (variable display time reset command) to be transmitted to the display control board 12 is prepared. When the number of executions of the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B does not reach the number of continuous effects “4” during the period until the special symbol variation display times Ti18 and Ti88 in the variation pattern D elapse, By adding a predetermined increase value to the timer value in the one variation time timer, the variation display time of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is extended. At this time, by transmitting a variable display time reset command from the main board 11 to the display control board 12, the variable display time of the decorative symbols in the first image display device 5A is also extended. Then, when the second variation display end command is transmitted after the number of executions of the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B reaches the number of continuous effects, the variation in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is transmitted. The display result is controlled to be derived and displayed, and a first variation display end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the display control board 12 to derive a variation display result of the decorative pattern in the first image display device 5A. What is necessary is just to make it display.

  Furthermore, regardless of whether or not the second reserved storage number in the special figure storage unit 121 is equal to or greater than the continuous production execution allowable value, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous production or whether or not to execute the continuous production. As another method for enabling the determination, for example, the progress of the variation display of the special symbol by the variation pattern D started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the determination or determination to execute the continuous effect is performed. 2 The special symbol display device 4B may temporarily stop until the number of executions of the special symbol game reaches the number of continuous effects. Specifically, after the first special symbol display device 4A starts the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game with the variation pattern D, the special substrate variation display is displayed from the main board 11 when the special symbol variation display is temporarily stopped. A display control command (variable display progress stop command) transmitted to the control board 12 and a main board 11 to the display control board 12 when restarting the progress of the variable display of the special symbol once stopped. A display control command (variable display progress restart command) may be prepared. In response to receiving the variable display progress stop command, the display control board 12 side temporarily stops the progress of the decorative display of the decorative pattern in the first image display device 5A, while receiving the variable display progress restart command. In response, the display of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols in the first image display device 5A once stopped is resumed.

  In this case, after the special symbol variation display by the variation pattern D is started, when the number of executions of the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B does not reach the number of continuous effects before the predetermined period elapses, the first special symbol is displayed. The progress of the special symbol game on the symbol display device 4A is stopped, and the change display progress stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the display control board 12 to thereby advance the display of the variable symbols on the first image display device 5A. Stop. Even when the progress of the special figure game is stopped, the special symbol variation display is continuously performed, and the decorative symbol variation display is also continuously performed. You may control so that it may not be performed. Then, when the number of executions of the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B reaches the number of continuous effects, the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A is started again and displayed from the main board 11. By transmitting a variable display progress restart command to the control board 12, the display of the variable display of decorative symbols in the first image display device 5A is started again. At this time, the first special symbol so that the fluctuation display result in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed after the fluctuation display result in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. You may make it adjust and set the progress stop timing of a special figure game in the display apparatus 4A, a progress restart timing, the transmission timing of a change display progress stop command, a change display progress restart command, etc.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the 1st big hit flag is set to ON in step S241 of FIG. 42 (step S241; Yes), the number of reservation memory in the special figure reservation memory | storage part 121 is continuous in step S245. It has been described that it is determined that the continuous production is always executed if the production execution allowable value is exceeded (step S245; Yes). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined in step S245 that the number of reserved storage in the special figure reservation storage unit 121 is equal to or greater than the continuous effect execution allowable value, it is stored in the ROM 101 in advance. It is determined whether or not the continuous effect is executed by referring to the big hit time continuous effect determination table, and when it is determined that the continuous effect is executed, the process proceeds to step S246 and the continuous effect is executed. You may set so that you can. Here, the big success time continuous effect determination table is the same as the lost time continuous effect determination table referred to in step S252, and the random result MR6 for determining the continuous effect execution and the determination result of whether or not to execute the continuous effect. As long as it is configured from setting data or the like.

  In this case, the allocation of the random value for continuous effect execution determination to the determination result of executing the continuous effect may be different between the big success time continuous effect determination table and the loss continuous effect determination table. For example, in the big success time continuous effect determination table, the random value MR6 for continuous effect execution determination is set to be assigned to the determination result indicating that the continuous effect is executed as compared with the continuous effect determination table at the time of loss. Thereby, when referring to the big success time continuous effect determination table, it is determined that the continuous effect is executed at a higher rate than when the lost time continuous effect determination table is referred to. By setting such a determination table, the jackpot reliability for the continuous performance is increased, so that when the continuous performance is executed, the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When it is determined that the continuous effect is not executed by referring to the big success time continuous effect determination table, the process proceeds to step S256 of FIG. 43 to determine the variation pattern in the special game by the first special symbol display device 4A. do it. Thereby, even when the fluctuation display result of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A becomes a big hit, it can be set so that the continuous effect may not be executed.

  In addition, when the number of reserved storage in the special figure storage unit 121 is equal to or greater than the continuous effect execution allowable value, it is determined that the continuous effect is executed on condition that the first big hit flag is on, and the continuous effect is performed. When the first big hit flag is on when it is less than the permissible execution value, for example, referring to the big success time continuous effect determination table, at a lower rate than when the continuous big effect execution allowable value or more, A determination to execute the continuous performance may be made. Alternatively, by referring to a different continuous performance determination table depending on whether it is greater than or less than the continuous performance execution allowable value, the ratio of executing the continuous performance when it is less than the continuous performance execution allowable value is determined. You may make it lower than when it is more than an allowable value.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the first special symbol process in step S16 and the second special symbol process in step S17 have been described as being executed as separate processes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and processing common to the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B is executed as the first and second special symbol process. May be. In addition, each time the game control interrupt process shown in FIG. 37 is executed, the first and second special symbol process processes are both executed once. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Each time the game control interrupt process is executed, only one of the first and second special symbol process processes may be alternately executed once.

  In the above embodiment, the number of continuous effects is “4”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined effect operation can be performed during multiple special symbol display. Any number of continuous performances can be set. In step S245 shown in FIG. 42, as in steps S250 to S252, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect based on the random value MR6 for determining the continuous effect execution. If it is determined in step S277 shown in FIG. 44 that the value of the effect mode flag is “0”, the process proceeds to step S279 without executing the process in step S278, and the continuous effect execution determination is performed. Based on the random value MR6, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect. When it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the second reserved memory number in the special figure storage unit 121 is specified, and the number of continuous effects is determined based on the specified second reserved memory number. Also good. As a specific example, the same numerical value as the specified second reserved storage number may be set as the number of consecutive effects. In this case, the continuous effect pattern determination process in step S308 and the final effect pattern determination process in step S309 shown in FIG. 47 are set as the number of continuous effects so that the variable display pattern can be determined according to the determined number of continuous effects. A plurality of types may be prepared.

  Alternatively, the second reserved memory number in the special figure storage unit 121 is specified and specified when it is determined that the continuous effect is executed by executing steps S245 and S250 in FIG. 42 or step S278 in FIG. The number of continuous effects may be determined based on the second reserved memory number. For example, the continuous effect execution allowable value in steps S245 and S250 in FIG. 42 and step S278 in FIG. 44 is set to “3”. Then, when it is determined in step S245 in FIG. 42 that the second reserved storage number is equal to or greater than the continuous effect execution allowable value, or in step S252 in FIG. 42 or step S280 in FIG. 44, the continuous effect is executed. When the determination is made, it is specified whether the second reserved storage number is “3” or “4”. The number of continuous effects may be determined based on the second reserved storage number specified in this way. As a specific example, if the second reserved memory number is “3”, the number of continuous effects is set to “3”, while if the second reserved memory number is “4”, the number of continuous effects is also “4”. May be set.

  In the embodiment described above, the ordinary variable winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are described as the first and second starting winning holes. That is, it has been described that one start winning opening is provided for each of the two special symbol display devices, and the first start condition and the second start condition are different from each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one start winning opening corresponding to both the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B is provided, and the first and second special symbol display devices are provided. The starting conditions for executing the special game according to 4A and 4B may be the same.

  In this case, when a game ball won in one start winning opening is detected by the start winning opening switch, for example, numerical data indicating a jackpot determination random number MR1 updated by the random number circuit 104 or the like is extracted, and the first Either the first start condition for executing the special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4A or the second start condition for executing the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start winning data “first” is stored in the special figure holding storage unit 121, while when the second start condition is satisfied, the start winning data “second” is stored in the special figure holding storage unit. 121 may be stored. At this time, for example, the first and second start conditions may be alternately satisfied each time numerical value data indicating the jackpot determination random number MR1 is extracted. Further, when extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for jackpot determination, the numerical data indicating the random value for distribution determination is extracted, and the first and second start operations are performed according to the random number value for distribution determination. Any of the conditions may be satisfied.

  Furthermore, it may be determined which of the first and second start conditions is established based on the jackpot determination random number value MR1 extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like. For example, it is assumed that the random value MR1 for jackpot determination takes a value in the range of “0” to “599”. In this case, when the jackpot determination random number MR1 extracted according to the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening is within the range of “0” to “299”, the first start condition is satisfied. On the other hand, when the extracted random number MR1 for jackpot determination is within the range of “300” to “599”, the second start condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, when the random number MR1 for jackpot determination is “3”, it is determined that the variation display result in the special game by the first special symbol display device 4A is a jackpot, and for the jackpot determination When the random value MR1 is “303”, it may be determined that the variation display result in the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B is a big hit. Alternatively, the internal structure of one start winning opening is divided into a first path for guiding the game ball to the installation position of the first detection switch that establishes the first start condition when the game ball is detected, and second when the game ball is detected. The first detection path is divided into a first path and a second path that are separated into a second path that guides the game ball to a position where the second detection switch that establishes the start condition is established, and that wins the start winning opening. And you may make it guide | lead so that either of a 2nd detection switch may detect.

  In addition, the special figure storage unit 121 stores numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for jackpot determination extracted when a game ball won in one start winning opening is detected by the start winning opening switch, Each time a start condition for starting a special game by either one of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A, 4B is satisfied, the first entry in the special figure storage unit 121 (entry with a reservation number “1”) It is also possible to read numerical data representing the jackpot determination random number MR1 and execute various processes for starting a special game such as a jackpot determination process. That is, the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are sequentially read out from the numerical data indicating the value of the jackpot determination random number extracted when the game ball won first is detected by the start winning opening switch. Among any special figure games, it may be used for a special figure game in which the start condition is established first.

  Further, when the ordinary variable winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided corresponding to the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, respectively, the normal variable winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6A are normally variable. When a game ball wins one of the winning ball devices 6B, for example, numerical data updated as data indicating one kind of jackpot determination random number value by the random number circuit 104 or the like (for example, stored in one count value storage circuit) Numerical value data) is extracted, and the start prize data “first” and the start prize data “first” correspond to which of the normal variable prize ball apparatus 6A and the normal variable prize ball apparatus 6B the game ball has won. Any of “2” may be stored in the special figure holding storage unit 121 in association with the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the jackpot.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first start for executing the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A when the game ball won in the normal variable winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start winning port switch 41a. While the condition is satisfied, the second start for executing the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B when the game ball won in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start winning port switch 41b. It has been described that the condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball won in the normal variable winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start winning port switch 41a, the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B. While the second starting condition for executing the above is established, when the game ball that has won the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting winning port switch 41b, a special game by the first special symbol display device 4A is played. A first start condition for execution may be satisfied.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a correspondence relationship between which one of the first and second start conditions is satisfied in response to the detection of the game ball by the first and second start winning port switches 41a and 41b, respectively. May be changed. As a specific example, in the initial setting state such as immediately after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the first start condition is determined when a game ball that has won the normal variable winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start winning port switch 41a. On the other hand, the second start condition is satisfied when the game ball that has won the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting winning port switch 41b. Thereafter, when the big hit gaming state due to the big win in the special figure game by any of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A, 4B is ended, it is assumed that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a normal variable prize is awarded. When the game ball won in the ball device 6A is detected by the first start winning port switch 41a, the second start condition is satisfied, while the game ball won in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is set by the first start winning port switch 41b. When detected, the setting may be changed so that the second start condition is satisfied. Further, every time the big hit gaming state is finished, the correspondence relationship between which of the first and second starting conditions is met in response to the detection of the game ball by the first and second starting winning port switches 41a and 41b, respectively. May be controlled to change.

  In the above-described embodiment, the special figure reservation storage unit 121 common to both the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B stores the numerical data indicating the jackpot determination random value MR1, the start winning data, etc. It was explained as being stored in association with. On the other hand, you may provide a separate special figure reservation memory | storage part corresponding to each of 1st and 2nd special symbol display apparatus 4A, 4B. For example, a first special symbol storage unit may be provided corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A, and a second special symbol reservation storage unit may be provided corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B. In this case, in steps S245 and S250 of FIG. 42 and step S278 of FIG. 44, it may be determined whether or not the number of reserved memories in the second special figure reservation storage unit is equal to or greater than the continuous effect execution allowable value. . In addition, when a separate special figure storage unit is provided corresponding to each of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, one special figure storage unit is associated with a predetermined reservation number. When storing the numerical data indicating the value of the jackpot determining random number, the other special figure holding storage unit associates the holding number with the numerical value indicating the value of the big hit determining random number in the other party special drawing holding storage unit. Control data indicating that is stored may be stored.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the start winning data is stored together with the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for jackpot determination in the special figure storage unit 121 common to both the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B. Thus, when the game ball that has won the normal variable winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting winning port switch 41a, the first starting condition is established and the special game by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed. On the other hand, when the game ball won in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting winning port switch 41b, the second starting condition is satisfied and a special game by the second special symbol display device 4B is executed. It was described as being executable. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for jackpot determination is stored in the special figure holding storage unit 121 common to both the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B. Each time the start condition for storing and starting the special game by either of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A, 4B is satisfied, the top entry (holding number “1” The numerical data indicating the jackpot determination random number MR1 may be read out from the “) entry”, and various processes for starting the special game such as the jackpot / probability determination process may be executed. That is, regardless of whether the game ball has won the normal variable winning ball device 6A serving as the first starting winning port or the normal variable winning ball device 6B serving as the second starting winning port, the game ball won first. Are sequentially read from the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for jackpot determination extracted by detecting the start winning port switch (the first start winning port switch 41a or the second start winning port switch 41b). Of the special symbol games by any one of the second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, the special symbol game in which the start condition is established first may be used.

  In the said embodiment, while performing the display in the continuous production which becomes the 1st production by the information 60a-60d shown in Drawing 21 (A)-(D), as shown in Drawing 21 (E)-(G). It demonstrated as what performs the effect display used as a 2nd effect with an image. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention is included in the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R under the control of the sound control board and the game effect lamp 9 performed under the control of the lamp control board. You may make it perform the continuous production over the special drawing game of multiple times by lighting or blinking of various production lamps, and also the operation of the accessory consisting of a movable member. Furthermore, the display on any of the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B, the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or blinking of a predetermined lamp, Any one of the movements of the objects may be combined to perform a continuous effect that is the first effect or an effect operation that is the second effect that is different from the first effect.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the continuous effect is executed, the second image display is performed regardless of whether the variation display result of the special figure game on the first special symbol display device 4A is a big hit or a loss. In the apparatus 5B, it demonstrated that the effect display in the continuous effect of the same aspect could be made. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second image display device 5B has different modes depending on whether the variation display result of the special symbol game on the first special symbol display device 4A is a big hit or a loss. An effect display may be made. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns ζ1 (normal loss) to ζ3 (normal loss) for displaying the notification information 60e different from the notification information 60a to 60d, such as “may come ...”, are changed from the fluctuation pattern β1 (normal loss) to What is necessary is just to provide instead of fluctuation pattern (beta) 3 (normal loss). Then, in the normal time adjustment process in step S449 of FIG. 51, any one of the variation patterns ζ1 (normal loss) to ζ3 (normal loss) based on the timer value in the first variation time timer is selected as the current special time. The change pattern used in the figure game may be selected and determined. In this way, when the variation display result of the special symbol game on the first special symbol display device 4A is a big hit, the notification information 60a shown in FIGS. 21 (A) to (D) in the second image display device 5B. While the effect display in the continuous effect that is the first effect is performed by ˜60d, the effect display in the continuous effect that is the first effect is performed by the notification information 60a to 60c, 60e in the case of loss. Therefore, the effect display mode in the continuous effect can be varied depending on the variation display result.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, after the effect display which is a part of continuous effect used as the 1st effect is performed during the special symbol fluctuation display in one special symbol game by the 2nd special symbol display device 4B, When the variation display result is a big hit in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the second effect is produced during the subsequent special symbol variation display in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Display will be performed. On the other hand, the special game in the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B after the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is a big hit in the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B. During the variation display of the symbols, the remaining portion of the continuous effect that is the first effect may be displayed. In this case, for example, the variation pattern α2 (big hit) may be determined in step S416 shown in FIG. 49, and the variation pattern α2 (normal loss) may be determined in step S419. Thereby, in at least two special symbol games by the second special symbol display device 4A, during the special symbol variable display, the second image display device 5B performs an effect display that constitutes a continuous effect as the first effect. become.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the turning-on / off control of the start winning memory display 10 is performed on the main board 11 side. On the other hand, the turning on / off control of the start winning memory display 7 may be performed on the display control board 12 side. In this case, the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 displays a display control command indicating the reserved storage number when the reserved storage number of the special figure reservation storage unit 121 is changed by adding 1 or subtracting 1 or the like. Setting for transmission to the control board 12 is performed. Then, the CPU 112 mounted on the display control board 12 may perform the on / off control of the start winning memory display 10 in accordance with the reserved memory number indicated by the display control command from the main board 11.

  Moreover, although the start winning memory | storage display 10 demonstrated as what was provided in the upper part of 1st and 2nd special symbol display apparatus 4A, 4B, it is not limited to this, For example, the start winning memory | storage display 7 and Similarly, the display enabling the start winning memory number to be specified may be performed in a predetermined display area provided in the first image display device 5A or the second image display device 5B. Furthermore, both the display of the start prize memory number on the start prize memory display 10 and the display of the start prize memory number on any of the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B may be performed.

  In addition, after the second image display device 5B performs a continuous effect as a first effect and an effect display as a second effect in a plurality of special symbol games by the second special symbol display device 4B, the first special image is displayed. The period until the big hit in the special game by the symbol display device 4A and / or when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B A predetermined effect display may be performed in an effect mode different from the effect and the second effect. For example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 sequentially transmits to the display control board 12 display control commands corresponding to the progress of the special figure game in the first and second special symbol display devices 4A and 4B. The display control CPU 130 controls the display operation in the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B in accordance with the display control command received from the main board 11, thereby producing effects in the first and second image display devices 5A and 5B. The display mode of the display can be switched.

  In addition, as long as the gaming machine of the present invention is a ball game machine such as a pachinko game machine, the game machine may be, for example, a general electric machine or a ball game machine with a probability setting function called pachikon. Further, it may be a CR-type pachinko gaming machine that lends a ball with a prepaid card or a pachinko gaming machine that lends a ball with cash. In other words, any form of game machine may be used as long as it has an image display device such as an LCD and can display the symbols as identification information in a variable manner. In addition, the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine.

  The present invention can also be applied to a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like by a detachable recording medium, but preinstalled in a storage device such as a computer device or the like in advance. You may take the form distributed by keeping it. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. Also by applying the present invention to such a game machine or the like, it is possible to display an image such as a decorative design rich in performance.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the decoration design displayed with an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows a mode that the display mode of the decoration symbol shown in FIG. 2 changes. It is a figure which shows an example of the decoration design displayed with an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows a mode that the display mode of the decoration symbol shown in FIG. 4 changes. It is a figure which shows an example of the decoration design displayed with an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows a mode that the display mode of the decoration symbol shown in FIG. 6 changes. It is a figure which shows a mode that the display mode of the image for ring effects combined with the decoration design shown in FIG. 6 changes. It is a block diagram which shows the system configuration example in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of a display control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number counted by the random number circuit by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the normal time big hit determination table and the probability change big hit determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fixed special symbol determination table at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is a figure for demonstrating fluctuation pattern A1-A3. It is a figure for demonstrating fluctuation pattern B1. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the return amount corresponding to a decoration design. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern C1. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern C2. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern C3. It is a figure which illustrates the effect display performed as a 1st effect or a 2nd effect. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the pattern determination table at the time of a normal lose, the pattern determination table at the time of reach loss, and the pattern determination table at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the hardware structural example of a display control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number counted by the display control board side. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the decoration design determination table fixed at the time of a normal jackpot, and the design determination table fixed at the time of a probability big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left fixed decoration design determination table, a middle fixed decorative design determination table, and a right fixed decorative design determination table. It is a figure which shows the image data memorize | stored in CGROM. It is a figure which shows the image data memorize | stored in CGROM. It is a figure which shows the image data memorize | stored in CGROM. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the index data table memorize | stored in ROM. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the index data table memorize | stored in ROM. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the index data table memorize | stored in ROM. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display area size data table, a fluctuation speed definition table, and a fluctuation direction definition table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation speed and direction data table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation speed and direction data table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal process performed within a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit and probability variation determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the fluctuation | variation start performed within a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the fluctuation | variation start performed within a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal process performed within a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal process performed within a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the fluctuation | variation start performed within a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the fluctuation | variation start performed within a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the pattern determination process for continuation effects. It is a flowchart which shows the pattern determination process for continuation effects. It is a flowchart which shows the pattern determination process for continuation effects. It is a flowchart which shows the pattern determination process for final effects. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit time adjustment pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st reach time adjustment pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd reach time adjustment pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st normal time adjustment pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd normal time adjustment pattern determination process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a big hit time continuous production pattern. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a continuous effect pattern at the time of a loss. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st display control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the decoration symbol fluctuation | variation display start process performed within a 1st display control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during decoration symbol fluctuation | variation display performed within a 2nd display control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the image display control process performed corresponding to fluctuation pattern A1-A3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the image display control process performed corresponding to fluctuation pattern B1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the image display control process performed corresponding to the fluctuation patterns C1-C3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the display image production | generation process and image display interruption process which VDP performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the decoration symbol in the fluctuation | variation display in fluctuation | variation pattern A2. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the decoration symbol in the fluctuation | variation display in fluctuation | variation pattern A3. It is a figure for demonstrating the image display operation | movement by variation pattern A1-A3. It is a figure for demonstrating the image display operation | movement by variation pattern A1-A3. It is a figure for demonstrating the image display operation | movement by the fluctuation pattern B1. It is a figure for demonstrating the image display operation | movement by the fluctuation pattern B1. It is a figure for demonstrating the image display operation | movement by the fluctuation patterns C1-C3. It is a figure for demonstrating the image display operation | movement by the fluctuation patterns C1-C3. It is a figure for demonstrating the image display operation | movement by the fluctuation patterns C1-C3. It is a timing chart showing an example of a display operation when variably displaying with variation patterns A1 to A3. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a display operation when a variable display is performed with a fluctuation pattern B1. FIG. 12 is a timing diagram illustrating an example of a display operation when variably displaying with variation patterns C1 to C3. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of a display operation in a special symbol display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a fluctuation | variation display in an image display apparatus. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of a display operation in the special symbol display apparatus in a modification. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of a display operation in the special symbol display apparatus in a modification. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of a display operation in the special symbol display apparatus in a modification. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of a display operation in the special symbol display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the modification of the image data memorize | stored in CGROM. It is a figure which shows the modification of the index data table memorize | stored in ROM. It is a figure which shows the modification of a fluctuation speed and direction data table. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of an image display control process. It is a figure for demonstrating the image display operation | movement in a modification. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of a display operation when carrying out the variable display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the modification from which the display mode of a decoration design changes. It is a figure which shows the modification of the fluctuation pattern using the decoration design which consists of a combination of a number and a character.

Explanation of symbols

1 ... Pachinko machine
2… Game board
3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5A, 5B ... Image display device 6A, 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7A, 7B ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker
9 ... Game effect lamp
10 ... Start winning memory indicator
11 ... Main board
12 ... Display control board
13 ... Signal relay board
20 ... Normal symbol display
21 ... Passing gates 41a, 41b ... Start prize opening switch
70… Each prize opening switch
100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 131 ... ROM
102, 132 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104 ... Random number circuit
105… I / O port
107… switch circuit
110 ... Normal jackpot judgment table
111 ... Jackpot judgment table for probability change
112… Special symbol determination table when lost
113 ... Fluctuation pattern table
114 ... Normal loss pattern determination table
115 ... Reach loss pattern determination table
116 ... Big hitting pattern determination table
120 ... Game control data holding area
121 ... Special figure storage section
122 ... Confirmed special symbol storage
123 ... Game control flag setting part
124 ... Game control timer setting section
125 ... Game control counter setting part
130 ... CPU for display control
133 ... VDP
134… CGROM
135 ... VRAM
136A, 136B ... LCD drive circuit
140 ... Ordinary jackpot finalized decorative design determination table
141 ... Decided decorative symbol determination table at the probability of big hit
142… Left definite ornament design determination table
143 ... Medium-decision decorative design determination table
144 ... Right determined decorative design determination table

Claims (6)

Based on the establishment of the first variation start condition, the first image display means for displaying the variation display images of a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and on the basis that the second variation start condition is established, And a second image display means for displaying a variable display image of a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and a specific display result in which the display result of the variable information identification display by the first image display means is predetermined. Or a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variation display of the identification information by the second image display means becomes the specific display result,
Whether the display result of the variation display of the identification information by the first image display means is the specific display result, and whether the display result of the variation display of the identification information by the second image display means is the specific display result Pre-determining means for determining before the display result of the variation display of the identification information is derived and displayed,
Stop identification information determining means for determining final stop identification information to be a display result of variation display of identification information by each of the first and second image display means according to a determination result of the prior determination means;
According to the determination result of the prior determination means, a plurality of predetermined variable display times from the start of the variable display of the identification information by each of the first and second image display means until the display result is derived and displayed A variable display time setting means for setting any one variable display time from among the various variable display times;
The stop identification is performed when the variable display time set by the variable display time setting unit has elapsed after the variable display by the first image display unit is started and then the variable display by the first image display unit is started. The final stop identification information determined by the information determining means is derived and displayed on the first image display means to stop the change, start the change display by the second image display means, and then change by the second image display means. When the variable display time set by the variable display time setting unit has elapsed since the start of display, the second image display unit derives and displays the final stop identification information determined by the stop identification information determination unit. Fluctuation display control means for stopping fluctuations,
When the pre-determination unit determines that the display result of the variation display of the identification information by the first image display unit is the specific display result, the identification by the first image display unit is performed by the variation display control unit A specific effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect in the variable information display by the second image display means before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of information is started. When,
A specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect when the specific effect is determined by the specific effect determination means;
Identification information image data storage means for storing image data for displaying each of the plurality of types of identification information in a plurality of display modes;
Identification information arrangement specifying information for specifying the type and arrangement of the identification information stored in the identification information image data storage means, and an identification information image for specifying an image change and an order of change of each identification information Identification information specific information storage means for storing change specific information in association with each other;
Fluctuation speed direction designating means for designating the fluctuation speed of the identification information and the fluctuation direction of the identification information;
Display area specifying means for specifying a display area for displaying identification information;
Sequence information specifying means for specifying sequence information of identification information to be changed based on information indicating the speed and direction of change specified by the variable speed direction specifying unit and the identification information sequence specifying information When,
Based on the array information specified by the array information specifying means and the identification information image change specifying information stored in the identification information specifying information storage means, the image data of the identification information to be changed is displayed. Change image data specifying means for specifying;
With
The variable display control means reads the image data specified by the change image data specifying means from the identification information image data storage means, and displays the read image data in the display area specified by the display area specifying means Including change image display control means for changing the image of the identification information by repeating
A gaming machine characterized by that. Based on the sequence information specified by the sequence information specifying means, comprising changing image data specifying means for specifying the image data of the identification information to be changed and displayed,
The fluctuation display control means reads the image data specified by the changing image data specifying means from the identification information image data storage means, and displays the read image data in the display area specified by the display area specifying means. Including changing image display control means for displaying the identification information image without changing by repeating the process,
The gaming machine according to claim 1. First variation direction designating data for designating a first variation direction that is predetermined as the variation direction of the identification information designated by the variation speed direction designating means, and a second variation direction that is the return direction of the first variation direction. Based on the second variation direction designation data, the return position data for designating the return position for each identification information when the identification information varies in the second variation direction, Control data storage means for storing stop position data for designating the final stop position of the final stop identification information determined by the stop identification information determination means,
The changing image display control means performs a change display in the first change direction based on the first change direction designation data stored in the control data storage means,
After the change display is performed by the changing image display control means, the change display control means, when stopping the change of the identification information, the second change direction designation data stored in the control data storage means and , Based on the return position data corresponding to the identification information to be stopped, following the change display in the second change direction, the first change direction designation data stored in the control data storage means, And stop position return display control means for performing variation display in the first variation direction based on the stop position data.
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein: Effect image data storage means for storing image data for displaying effect images used for predetermined effect display in a plurality of display modes;
Effect image specifying information storage means for storing effect image change specifying information for specifying the image change and change order of the effect images stored in the effect image data storage means;
Based on the image change and change order of the effect image specified by the effect image change specifying information stored in the effect image specifying information storage means, any one of the changed image data specifying means and the changing image data specifying means Effect image data specifying means for specifying the image data of the effect image to be combined with the image data of the identification information specified by
With
The fluctuation display control means reads out the image data specified by either the changing image data specifying means or the changing image data specifying means from the identification information image data storage means and specifies the effect image data specifying means. The combined image data is read from the effect image data storage means, and the read image data is combined and displayed in the display area specified by the display area specifying means, thereby repeating the process of changing the image of the identification information. Including display control means,
After the change of the identification information is stopped following the change display by the changing image display control means, the change image display control means stops the change based on the image data specified by the change image data specifying means. Change display processing to change the display mode of identification information,
The composite display control means is a variation in which the variation display mode of the identification information satisfies a condition in which the identification information already derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the specific display result when the display result is not yet derived and displayed. When the reach is the display mode, the combined image data is displayed.
The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, characterized in that. Image data in which a plurality of display images used for a predetermined effect display are combined with an image for displaying each of the plurality of types of identification information in a single display mode, and the plurality of types of effect images Effect variation image data storage means for storing image data combined with an image for displaying each of the identification information in a plurality of display modes;
Effect variation image array specifying information for specifying the type and arrangement of images stored in the effect change image data storage means, and effect change image change specifying information for specifying image change and change order, Specific information storage means for effect variation to be stored;
An effect that specifies the arrangement information of the synthesized image to be changed and displayed based on the information indicating the fluctuation speed and the fluctuation direction designated by the fluctuation speed direction designation means and the effect fluctuation image arrangement specifying information. A means for specifying the array information when changing
Based on the sequence information specified by the sequence information specifying means at the time of effect change and the effect change image change specifying information stored in the specification information storage means for effect change, a synthesized object to be changed is displayed. Effect variation image data specifying means for specifying image data;
With
The fluctuating display control means reads the synthesized image data specified by the effect changing image data specifying means from the effect changing image data storage means, and the read image data is specified by the display area specifying means. Including effect variation display control means for changing the image of the identification information by repeating the process of displaying on
After the change of the identification information is stopped following the change display by the changing image display control means, the change image display control means stops the change based on the image data specified by the change image data specifying means. Change display processing to change the display mode of identification information,
The effect variation display control means satisfies a condition that the variation display mode of the identification information is a stage where the display result is not yet derived and displayed, and the identification information already derived and displayed is the specific display result. When the reach is a variable display mode, the synthesized image data is displayed.
The gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, characterized in that. A size specifying means for specifying the size of the identification information is provided.
The variable display control means converts the image data read from the identification information image data storage means into a display area specified by the display area specifying means based on the size specified by the size specifying means. Repeat the process to display,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that:

Images